Thiết bị Core Switch

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 307

QFX5120 Switch Hardware Guide

Published

2024-05-28
ii

Juniper Networks, Inc.


1133 Innovation Way
Sunnyvale, California 94089
USA
408-745-2000
www.juniper.net

Juniper Networks, the Juniper Networks logo, Juniper, and Junos are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc.
in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks, service marks, registered marks, or registered service
marks are the property of their respective owners.

Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right
to change, modify, transfer, or otherwise revise this publication without notice.

QFX5120 Switch Hardware Guide


Copyright © 2024 Juniper Networks, Inc. All rights reserved.

The information in this document is current as of the date on the title page.

YEAR 2000 NOTICE

Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant. Junos OS has no known time-related
limitations through the year 2038. However, the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036.

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

The Juniper Networks product that is the subject of this technical documentation consists of (or is intended for use
with) Juniper Networks software. Use of such software is subject to the terms and conditions of the End User License
Agreement ("EULA") posted at https://support.juniper.net/support/eula/. By downloading, installing or using such
software, you agree to the terms and conditions of that EULA.
iii

Table of Contents
About This Guide | ix

1 Overview
QFX5120 System Overview | 2

QFX5120 Switches Hardware Overview | 2

QFX5120 Switch Models and Variants | 17

QFX5120 Switch Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping | 21

QFX5120 Chassis | 27

Chassis Physical Specifications for QFX5120 Switches | 27

Field-Replaceable Units in QFX5120 Switches | 28

Chassis Status LEDs in QFX5120 Switches | 29

LEDs on the Management Port on QFX5120 Switches | 33

Network Port LEDs on QFX5120 Switches | 36

QFX5120 Cooling System | 44

QFX5120 Power System | 58

AC Power Supply in QFX5120 Switches | 58

Power Supply Specifications for AC Power Supplies for QFX5120 Switches | 63

Specifications of the Power Cord for AC Power Supplies for QFX5120 Switches | 66

LEDs on the AC Power Supplies Used in QFX5120 Switches | 68

DC Power Supply in QFX5120 Switches | 71

Power Supply Specifications for DC Power Supplies for QFX5120 Switches | 78

LEDs on the DC Power Supplies Used in QFX5120 Switches | 80

High-Voltage Power Supply for QFX5120-48T Switches | 83

2 Site Planning, Preparation, and Specifications


Site Preparation Checklist for QFX5120 Switches | 95
iv

QFX5120 Site Guidelines and Requirements | 97

Environmental Requirements and Specifications for QFX5120 Switches | 97

General Site Guidelines | 98

Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines | 99

Rack Requirements for QFX5120 Switches | 100

Cabinet Requirements for QFX5120 Switches | 101

Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for QFX5120 Switches | 103

QFX5120 Network Cable and Transceiver Planning | 106

Pluggable Transceivers and Direct Attach Cables Supported on QFX5120 Switches | 106

Cable Specifications for QSFP+ and QSFP28 Transceivers on QFX5120 Switches | 107

How to Calculate the Fiber-Optic Cable Power Budget for QFX Series Switches | 109

How to Calculate the Fiber-Optic Cable Power Margin for QFX Series Switches | 110

QFX5120 Management Cable Specifications and Pinouts | 112

Console Port Connector Pinout Information | 112

RJ-45 Management Port Connector Pinout Information | 114

RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information | 114

RJ-45 Port, SFP Port, SFP+ Port, QSFP+ Port, and QSFP28 Port Connector Pinout Information | 115

3 Initial Installation and Configuration


Unpack and Mount the QFX5120 Switch | 124

Unpack the QFX5120 Switch | 124

Parts Inventory (Packing List) for a QFX5120 Switch | 125

Register Products—Mandatory to Validate SLAs | 128

Mount a QFX5120-32C Switch on a Four-Post Rack | 128

Mount a QFX5120-32C Switch on a Two-Post Rack | 132

Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch in a Rack or Cabinet by


Using the JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E Rack Mount Kit | 135

Mount the Device by Using the JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E Rack Mount Kit On a Square Hole
Rack | 135
v

Mount the Device by Using the JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E Rack Mount Kit On a Threaded Hole
Rack | 140

Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch Flush with the Front Posts
of a Rack or Cabinet | 146

Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch in a Recessed Position from


the Front Posts of a Rack or Cabinet | 151

Mount a QFX5120-48Y Switch on a Two-Post Rack | 157


Mount a QF5120-T Switch on a Two-Post Rack | 159

Mount a QFX5120-48YM Switch on a Two-Post Rack | 162

Connect the QFX5120 to Power | 164

Connect the QFX5120 Switch to Earth Ground | 165

Connect Power to an AC-Powered QFX5120 Switch | 170

Connect Power to a DC-Powered QFX5120 Switch | 173

Connect Power to a QFX5120-48T Switch Powered by a High-Voltage Power Supply | 179

Connect the QFX5120 to the Network | 181

Install a Transceiver | 181

Install a QSFP28 Transceiver | 184

Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable | 187

Connect the QFX5120 to External Devices | 188

Connect a Device to a Network for Out-of-Band Management | 188

Connect a Device to a Management Console Using an RJ‑45 Connector | 189

Connecting 1-PPS and 10-MHz Measurement Devices to the QFX5120 Switch | 191

Configure Junos OS on the QFX5120 | 191

QFX5120 Default Configuration | 191

Connect and Configure a QFX5120 Switch | 192

4 Maintaining Components
Maintain the QFX5120 Cooling System | 200

Remove a Fan Module from a QFX5120 Switch | 200


vi

Install a Fan Module in a QFX5120 Switch | 202

Maintain the QFX5120 Power System | 204

Remove a Power Supply from a QFX5120 Switch | 205

Install a Power Supply in a QFX5120 Switch | 208

Maintain Transceivers | 211

Remove a Transceiver | 212

Remove a QSFP28 Transceiver | 214

Install a Transceiver | 216

Install a QSFP28 Transceiver | 219

Maintain Fiber-Optic Cables | 221

Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable | 222

Disconnect a Fiber-Optic Cable | 223

How to Handle Fiber-Optic Cables | 223

5 Troubleshooting Hardware
Troubleshoot the QFX5120 Device | 226

Alarm Types and Severity Levels | 226

Chassis Alarm Messages | 228

Creating an Emergency Boot Device for QFX Series Switches | 232

Recovering the Installation Using an Emergency Boot Device on QFX Series Switches | 234

6 Contacting Customer Support and Returning the Chassis or Components


Return a QFX5120 Chassis or Components | 238

How to Return a QFX5120 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement | 238

Locate the Serial Number on a QFX5120 Switch or Component | 239

List the Switch and Components Details with the CLI | 239

Locate the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on a QFX5120 Switch | 240

Locate the Serial Number ID Labels on FRUs in a QFX5120 Switch | 241

Contact Customer Support to Obtain a Return Material Authorization | 249


vii

Pack a QFX5120 Switch or Component for Shipping | 250

Pack a QFX5120 Switch for Shipping | 250

Pack QFX5120 Switch Components for Shipping | 251

7 Safety and Compliance Information


General Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 255

Definitions of Safety Warning Levels | 256

Qualified Personnel Warning | 258

Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden | 258

Fire Safety Requirements | 259

Installation Instructions Warning | 260

Chassis and Component Lifting Guidelines | 261

Restricted Access Warning | 261

Ramp Warning | 263

Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings | 263

Grounded Equipment Warning | 267

Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning | 268

Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 269

Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 272

General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 278

Action to Take After an Electrical Accident | 279

Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage | 280

AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines | 281

AC Power Disconnection Warning | 282

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines | 283

DC Power Disconnection Warning | 284

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning | 286


viii

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning | 286

DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning | 288

Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning | 289

TN Power Warning | 290

Agency Approvals for QFX5120 Switches | 291

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for the QFX Series | 293

Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive Compliance | 297


ix

About This Guide

Use this guide to install hardware and perform initial software configuration, routine maintenance, and
troubleshooting for the QFX5120 switch. After completing the installation and basic configuration
procedures covered in this guide, refer to the Junos OS documentation for information about further
software configuration.
1CHAPTER

Overview

QFX5120 System Overview | 2

QFX5120 Chassis | 27

QFX5120 Cooling System | 44

QFX5120 Power System | 58


2

QFX5120 System Overview

IN THIS SECTION

QFX5120 Switches Hardware Overview | 2

QFX5120 Switch Models and Variants | 17

QFX5120 Switch Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping | 21

QFX5120 Switches Hardware Overview

IN THIS SECTION

Benefits of the QFX5120 Switch | 3

System Software and Hardware and Software Features | 3

Channelization in QFX5120 Switches | 4

Components on the Front and Rear Panels | 6

Virtual Chassis | 16

QFX5120 Cooling System | 16

QFX5120 Power System | 17

The QFX5120 line of switches delivers low latency, flexible deployment options, and rich automation
features. QFX5120 Switches build a strong underlay foundation for flexible, high-performance,
standards-based fabrics and routing that improve network reliability and agility.

The QFX5120 switch is available in four models—QFX5120-32C, QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and


QFX5120-48YM. Each model is available in two variants featuring AC power supplies with front-to-back
or back-to-front airflow and two models featuring DC power supplies with front-to-back or back-to-
front airflow.

For a brief overview of the QFX5120-48T switch, see:

Video: QFX5120-48T Switch Hardware Overview


3

For a brief overview of the QFX5120-48Y switch, see:

Video: QFX5120-48Y Switch Hardware Overview

For a brief overview of the QFX5120-48YM switch, see:

Video: QFX5120-48YM Switch Hardware Overview

Benefits of the QFX5120 Switch

EVPN-VXLAN architecture - QFX5120 Switches support IP fabrics with EVPN-VXLAN overlays,


enabling Layer 2/3 network virtualization.

Hop-by-hop encryption - QFX5120-48YM supports IEEE 802.1AE MACsec AES-256 on all ports to help
secure data center and Ethernet-based DCI/WAN deployments.

Synchronization services – Support for PTP enables QFX5120 to meet the requirements of the financial
services industry (FSI) and the broadcasting media industry.

Industry-leading wire speeds—QFX5120 switches offer 25-Gbps and 100-Gbps wire speeds.

Support for channelization—You can channelize the QSFP28 ports and increase the number of
interfaces.

Support for Virtual Chassis—All QFX5120 switch models support Virtual Chassis technology. You can
interconnect up to two QFX5120-32C, QFX5120-48T, or QFX5120-48Y, or up to four QFX5120-48YM
switches in a Virtual Chassis configuration.

System Software and Hardware and Software Features

Juniper Networks QFX Series Switches run Junos operating system (Junos OS), which provides Layer 2
and Layer 3 switching, routing, and security services. The first Junos OS release and hardware and
software features supported on the models are listed in Table 1 on page 4.
4

Table 1: First Junos OS Release and Hardware and Software Features Supported on QFX5120 Switch
Models

Switch First Junos OS Hardware Features Aggregate Software Features


Model Release Throughput
Supported (Bidirectional)

QFX5120 Junos OS • 2.2-GHz quad-core Intel 6.4 Tbps • Feature-rich


- Release CPU automation capabilities
32C 19.1R1 with support for
• 16-GB memory Python, Ansible,
YANG, Chef, and zero-
• 64-GB SSD storage touch provisioning
(ZTP)

QFX5120 Junos OS • 2.2-GHz quad-core Intel 2.16 Tbps


• Support for VXLAN as
- Release CPU a Layer 2 or Layer 3
48T 20.2R1
gateway and Open
• 16-GB memory vSwitch Database
(OVSDB) protocol as a
• 100-GB SSD storage
Layer 2 gateway

• Advanced Junos OS
QFX5120 Junos OS • 2.2-GHz quad-core Intel 4 Tbps
features such as EVPN,
- Release CPU BGP, MPLS, Layer 3
48Y 18.3R1
VPN, IPv6 Provider
• 16-GB memory
Edge (6PE), telemetry,
segment routing, and
• 50-GB SSD storage
MC-LAG

QFX5120 Junos OS • 2.9-GHz quad-core Intel 4 Tbps


- Release CPU
48YM 20.4R1
• 16-GB memory

• 100-GB SSD storage

Channelization in QFX5120 Switches

QFX5120 switches support channelization. You can channelize the 100GbE/40GbE quad small form-
factor pluggable (QSFP28) ports into interfaces by connecting breakout cables and by using CLI
configuration. Table 2 on page 5 lists the channelization supported on the models.
5

Table 2: Channelization in QFX5120 Switches

Switch Model Ports Port Supported For More Information


Spee Channelization
d

QFX5120-32C 0 through 30 40 Four 10GbE Channelizing Interfaces on


Gbps interfaces QFX5120-32C Switches

0 through 30 100 Four 25GbE


Gbps interfaces

0 through 31 100 Two 50GbE


Gbps interfaces
NOTE: The last 100GbE
port (31) does not support
4x10GbE or 4x25GbE
channelization options since
the lanes are shared with
the 10GbE SFP port. This
port supports only 100GbE/
40GbE and 2x50GbE
channelization options.

QFX5120-48T 50 and 51 40 Four 10GbE Channelizing Interfaces on


Gbps interfaces QFX5120-48T Switches

50 and 51 100 Four 25GbE


Gbps interfaces

48 through 53 100 Two 50GbE


Gbps interfaces

QFX5120-48Y 48 through 55 40 Four 10GbE Channelizing Interfaces on


Gbps interfaces QFX5120-48Y Switches

48 through 55 100 Four 25GbE


Gbps interfaces
6

Table 2: Channelization in QFX5120 Switches (Continued)

Switch Model Ports Port Supported For More Information


Spee Channelization
d

QFX5120-48YM 50 and 52 40 Four 10GbE Channelizing Interfaces on


Gbps interfaces QFX5120-48YM Switches

50 and 52 100 Four 25GbE


Gbps interfaces

50 and 52 100 Two 50GbE


Gbps interfaces

Components on the Front and Rear Panels

QFX5120-32C Switches

Figure 1 on page 6 shows the front view of the QFX5120-32C switch.

Figure 1: QFX5120-32C—Front View

Figure 2 on page 6 shows the rear view of the QFX5120-32C switch.

Figure 2: QFX5120-32C—Rear View

Figure 3 on page 7 shows the components on the front panel of a QFX5120-32C switch.
7

Figure 3: Components on the Front Panel of a QFX5120-32C Switch

1— QSFP28 ports 5— RJ-45 console port (labeled CON)

2— RJ-45 management port (labeled MGMT) 6— Chassis ID LED (labeled ID)

3— SFP+ ports 7— Reset button

4— USB port

Figure 4 on page 7 shows the components on the rear panel of a QFX5120-32C switch with AC
power supplies.

Figure 4: Components on the Rear Panel of a QFX5120-32C Switch with AC Power Supplies

1— AC power supply 3— Fan module LEDs

2— Fan modules

Figure 5 on page 8 shows the components on the rear panel of a QFX5120-32C switch with DC
power supplies.
8

Figure 5: Components on the Rear Panel of a QFX5120-32C Switch with DC Power Supplies

1— DC power supply 3— Fan module LEDs

2— Fan modules

QFX5120-48T Switches

Figure 6 on page 8 shows the front view of the QFX5120-48T switch.

Figure 6: QFX5120-48T—Front View

Figure 7 on page 8 shows the rear view of the QFX5120-48T switch.

Figure 7: QFX5120-48T—Rear View

Figure 8 on page 9 shows the components on the front panel of a QFX5120-48T switch.
9

Figure 8: Components on the Front Panel of a QFX5120-48T Switch

1— 10-Gbps BASE-T ports 2— 100GbE/40GbE QSFP28 ports

Figure 9 on page 9 shows the components on the rear panel of a QFX5120-48T switch with AC
power supplies.

Figure 9: Components on the Rear Panel of a QFX5120-48T Switch with AC Power Supplies

1— Chassis status LEDs (labeled ALM, SYS, MST, 8— Fan module LEDs
and ID)
2— RJ-45 management port (labeled MGMT) 9— 10M OUT port

3— PPS OUT port 10— USB port

4— ESD point 11— RJ-45 console port (labeled CON)

5— Fan modules 12— Reset button

6— AC power supplies 13— CLEI code label

7— AC power supply LEDs

Figure 10 on page 10 shows the components on the rear panel of a QFX5120-48T switch with DC
power supplies.
10

Figure 10: Components on the Rear Panel of a QFX5120-48T Switch with DC Power Supplies

1— Chassis status LEDs (labeled ALM, SYS, MST, 8— Fan module LEDs
and ID)
2— RJ-45 management port 9— 10M OUT port

3— PPS OUT port 10— USB port

4— ESD point 11— RJ-45 console port

5— Fan modules 12— Reset button

6— DC power supplies 13— CLEI code label

7— DC power supply LEDs

Figure 11 on page 10 shows the components on the rear panel of a QFX5120-48T switch with high-
voltage power supplies.

Figure 11: Components on the Rear Panel of a QFX5120-48T Switch with High-Voltage Power
Supplies

1— Chassis status LEDs (labeled ALM, SYS, MST, 8— Fan module LEDs
and ID)
2— RJ-45 management port 9— 10M OUT port

3— PPS OUT port 10— USB port

4— ESD point 11— RJ-45 console port

5— Fan modules 12— Reset button


11

6— High-voltage power supplies 13— CLEI code label

7— High-voltage power supply LEDs

QFX5120-48Y Switches

Figure 12 on page 11 shows the front view of the QFX5120-48Y switch.

Figure 12: QFX5120-48Y—Front View

Figure 13 on page 11 shows the rear view of the QFX5120-48Y switch.

Figure 13: QFX5120-48Y—Rear View

Figure 14 on page 11 shows the components on the front panel of a QFX5120-48Y switch.

Figure 14: Components on the Front Panel of a QFX5120-48Y Switch

1— SFP28 ports 2— QSFP28 ports

NOTE:
12

• The SFP28 ports are grouped in quads (groups of four) and you can configure the speed of
the ports only in quads; you cannot configure the speed for a single SFP28 port.

• The SFP28 ports can operate at 25-Gbps, 10-Gbps, or 1-Gbps speed, based on the
configuration set at the quad level. The ports are configured to operate at 10-Gbps speed by
default. If you need the ports to support the other speeds, you must configure those speeds.

CAUTION: When you use the latest OEM part number FCLF8521P2BTL (printed on
the transceiver label), you can install 1GbE transceivers (such as QFX-SFP-1GE-T) in any
port with no restrictions. The same applies for devices that support 10GbE copper
transceivers. However, if you are using the older OEM part number SP7041-M1-JN (not
shipped in last 3+ years) instead, do not install 1GbE copper transceivers (such as QFX-
SFP-1GE-T) directly above or below another 1GbE copper transceiver. Use only the top
row or bottom row to avoid damage to the device caused when the transceivers are
installed above or below each other.

Figure 15 on page 12 shows the components on the rear panel of a QFX5120-48Y switch with AC
power supplies.

Figure 15: Components on the Rear Panel of a QFX5120-48Y Switch with AC Power Supplies

1— Chassis status LEDs 7— Power supply LEDs

2— RJ-45 console port 8— Fan module LEDs

3— RJ-45 management port (labeled C1) 9— RJ-45 management port (labeled C0)

4— ESD point 10— Reset button

5— Fan modules 11— USB port

6— Power supplies 12— CLEI code label

Figure 16 on page 13 shows the components on the rear panel of a QFX5120-48Y switch with DC
power supplies.
13

Figure 16: Components on the Rear Panel of a QFX5120-48Y Switch with DC Power Supplies

1— Chassis status LEDs 7— Power supply LEDs

2— RJ-45 console port 8— Fan module LEDs

3— RJ-45 management port (labeled C1) 9— RJ-45 management port (labeled C0)

4— ESD point 10— Reset button

5— Fan modules 11— USB port

6— Power supplies 12— CLEI code label

QFX5120-48YM Switches

Figure 17 on page 13 shows the front view of the QFX5120-48YM switch.

Figure 17: QFX5120-48YM—Front View

Figure 18 on page 13 shows the rear view of the QFX5120-48YM switch.

Figure 18: QFX5120-48YM—Rear View

Figure 19 on page 14 shows the components on the front panel of a QFX5120-48YM switch.
14

Figure 19: Components on the Front Panel of a QFX5120-48YM Switch

1— SFP28 ports 2— QSFP28 ports

NOTE:

• The SFP28 ports are grouped in quads (groups of four) and you can configure the speed of
the ports only in quads; you cannot configure the speed for a single SFP28 port.

• The SFP28 ports can operate at 25-Gbps, 10-Gbps, or 1-Gbps speed, based on the
configuration set at the quad level. The ports are configured to operate at 10-Gbps speed by
default. If you need the ports to support the other speeds, you must configure those speeds.

Figure 20 on page 14 shows the components on the rear panel of a QFX5120-48YM switch with AC
power supplies.

Figure 20: Components on the Rear Panel of a QFX5120-48YM Switch with AC Power Supplies

1— Chassis status LEDs (labeled ALM, SYS, MST, 7— Power supply LEDs
and ID)
2— RJ-45 console port 8— Fan module LEDs

3— RJ-45 management port (labeled C1) 9— 10M OUT and PPS OUT ports

4— ESD point 10— RJ-45 management port (labeled C0)

5— Fan modules 11— Reset button

6— Power supplies 12— USB port


15

Figure 21 on page 15 shows the components on the rear panel of a QFX5120-48YM switch with DC
power supplies.

Figure 21: Components on the Rear Panel of a QFX5120-48YM Switch with DC Power Supplies

1— Chassis status LEDs (labeled ALM, SYS, MST, 7— Power supply LEDs
and ID)
2— RJ-45 console port 8— Fan module LEDs

3— RJ-45 management port (labeled C1) 9— 10M OUT and PPS OUT ports

4— ESD point 10— RJ-45 management port (labeled C0)

5— Fan modules 11— Reset button

6— Power supplies 12— USB port

The CLEI code label is on the top panel of QFX5120-48YM switches, above the management ports.
Figure 22 on page 15 shows the location of the CLEI code label.

Figure 22: Location of the CLEI Code Label on QFX5120-48YM Switches

1— CLEI code label


16

Virtual Chassis

All QFX5120 switch models support Virtual Chassis technology. You can connect a QX5120 switch only
with another QFX5120 switch of the same model in a Virtual Chassis configuration. QFX5120 switches
do not have dedicated or default Virtual Chassis ports (VCPs). However, you can configure any of the
QSFP28 ports as VCPs when those ports are not channelized. Table 3 on page 16 lists the Junos OS
release in which Virtual Chassis support is introduced and the QSFP28 ports that you can configure as
VCPs.
Table 3: Virtual Chassis Support in QFX5120 Switches

Model Support Introduced in Maximum Number of Switches Virtual Chassis Ports


Release in the Virtual Chassis

QFX5120-32C Junos OS Release 2 32 QSFP28 ports (0 through


20.3R1 31)

QFX5120-48T Junos OS Release 2 6 QSFP28 ports (48 through


20.2R1 53)

QFX5120-48Y Junos OS Release 2 8 QSFP28 ports (48 through


19.3R1 55)

QFX5120-48Y Junos OS Release 4 8 QSFP28 ports (48 through


M 23.1R1 55)

You configure, monitor, and maintain the QFX5120 Virtual Chassis the same way as you configure,
monitor, and maintain a Virtual Chassis involving other QFX Series switches. See the following topics for
more details on how to configure and change the members in a QFX5120 Virtual Chassis:

• Understanding Virtual Chassis Components

• Removing or Replacing a Member Switch of a Virtual Chassis Configuration

• Adding a New Switch to an Existing EX4650 or QFX Series Virtual Chassis

• Virtual Chassis Fabric Overview

QFX5120 Cooling System

The cooling system in QFX5120 switches consists of fan modules and built-in fans in the power
supplies. The airflow direction depends on the fan modules and power supplies installed in the switch.
You can order a QFX5120 switch that supports front-to-back airflow (air enters through the front of the
switch) or back-to-front airflow (air enters through the back of the switch).
17

The fan modules are hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable units (FRUs) installed in the rear
panel of the switch: You can remove and replace them without powering off the switch or disrupting
switch functions.

QFX5120 Power System

QFX5120-32C, QFX5120-48T, and QFX5120-48Y switches support two 650-W AC or DC power


supplies with front-to-back or back-to-front airflow. Additionally, QFX5120-48T switches support two
850-W high-voltage power supplies with AC or DC input and front-to-back or back-to-front airflow.
QFX5120-48YM switches support two 850-W AC or DC power supplies with front-to-back or back-to-
front airflow. Power supplies for the QFX5120 switch are fully redundant, load-sharing, and hot-
removable and hot-insertable FRUs when the second power supply is installed and running. You can
remove and replace them without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions. Each power
supply is cooled by its own internal cooling system. We ship QFX5120 switches with two AC or DC
power supplies preinstalled in the rear panel of the chassis.

CAUTION: Do not mix:

• AC and DC power supplies in the same chassis.

• 650-W and 850-W power supplies in the same QFX5120-48T chassis.

• Power supplies with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Fan modules with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Power supplies and fan modules with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

If you install power supplies or fan modules with different airflow directions, Junos OS
raises an alarm.

QFX5120 Switch Models and Variants

The QFX5120 has four models: QFX5120-32C, QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM.
Each of these models has variants depending on power supply (AC or DC) and airflow (front-to-back or
back-to-front). All variants of the QFX5120-32C switch ship with two power supplies and six fans
installed by default. All variants of the QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches
ship with two power supplies and five fans installed by default. Table 4 on page 18 lists the
components shipped with QFX5120 switch models and their variants.
18

Table 4: QFX5120 Switch Models and Their Configurations

Model Number Number of Ports and Power Supplies Shipped by Fan Modules Shipped by
Their Types Default Default

QFX5120- • 2 10GbE SFP+ Two 650-W AC power supplies Six fan modules with front-to-
32C-AFO with front-to-back airflow, back airflow, indicated by the
• 32 100GbE/ indicated by a red ejector lever. label F2B and a red handle.
40GbE QSFP28

QFX5120- • 2 10GbE SFP+ Two 650-W AC power supplies Six fan modules with back-to-
32C-AFI with back-to-front airflow, front airflow, indicated by the
• 32 100GbE/ indicated by a blue ejector label B2F and a blue handle.
40GbE QSFP28 lever.

QFX5120- • 2 10GbE SFP+ Two 650-W DC power supplies Six fan modules with front-to-
32C-DC-AFO with front-to-back airflow, back airflow, indicated by the
• 32 100GbE/ indicated by a red ejector lever. label F2B and a red handle.
40GbE QSFP28

QFX5120- • 2 10GbE SFP+ Two 650-W DC power supplies Six fan modules with back-to-
32C-DC-AFI with back-to-front airflow, front airflow, indicated by the
• 32 100GbE/ indicated by a blue ejector label B2F and a blue handle.
40GbE QSFP28 lever.

QFX5120- • 6 100GbE/40GbE Two 650-W AC power supplies Five fan modules with front-to-
48T-AFO QSFP28 with front-to-back airflow, back airflow, indicated by the
indicated by a Juniper Gold label AIR OUT and a Juniper
• 48 10GbE BASE-T ejector lever. Gold handle.

QFX5120- • 6 100GbE/40GbE Two 650-W AC power supplies Five fan modules with back-to-
48T-AFI QSFP28 with back-to-front airflow, front airflow, indicated by the
indicated by a Juniper Azure label AIR IN and a Juniper Azure
• 48 10GbE BASE-T Blue ejector lever. Blue handle.

QFX5120- • 6 100GbE/40GbE Two 650-W DC power supplies Five fan modules with front-to-
48T-DC-AFO QSFP28 with front-to-back airflow, back airflow, indicated by the
indicated by a Juniper Gold label AIR OUT and a Juniper
• 48 10GbE BASE-T ejector lever. Gold handle.
19

Table 4: QFX5120 Switch Models and Their Configurations (Continued)

Model Number Number of Ports and Power Supplies Shipped by Fan Modules Shipped by
Their Types Default Default

QFX5120- • 6 100GbE/40GbE Two 650-W DC power supplies Five fan modules with back-to-
48T-DC-AFI QSFP28 with back-to-front airflow, front airflow, indicated by the
indicated by a Juniper Azure label AIR IN and a Juniper Azure
• 48 10GbE BASE-T Blue ejector lever. Blue handle.

QFX5120- • 8 100GbE/40GbE Two 650-W AC power supplies Five fan modules with front-to-
48Y-AFO2 QSFP28 with front-to-back airflow, back airflow, indicated by the
indicated by a Juniper Gold label AIR OUT and a Juniper
• 48 25GbE/ ejector lever. Gold handle.
10GbE/1GbE
SFP28

QFX5120- • 8 100GbE/40GbE Two 650-W AC power supplies Five fan modules with back-to-
48Y-AFI2 QSFP28 with back-to-front airflow, front airflow, indicated by the
indicated by a Juniper Azure label AIR IN and a Juniper Azure
• 48 25GbE/ Blue ejector lever. Blue handle.
10GbE/1GbE
SFP28

QFX5120- • 8 100GbE/40GbE Two 650-W DC power supplies Five fan modules with front-to-
48Y-DC-AFO2 QSFP28 with front-to-back airflow, back airflow, indicated by the
indicated by a Juniper Gold label AIR OUT and a Juniper
• 48 25GbE/ ejector lever. Gold handle.
10GbE/1GbE
SFP28

QFX5120- • 8 100GbE/40GbE Two 650-W DC power supplies Five fan modules with back-to-
48Y-DC-AFI2 QSFP28 with back-to-front airflow, front airflow, indicated by the
indicated by a Juniper Azure label AIR IN and a Juniper Azure
• 48 25GbE/ Blue ejector lever. Blue handle.
10GbE/1GbE
SFP28
20

Table 4: QFX5120 Switch Models and Their Configurations (Continued)

Model Number Number of Ports and Power Supplies Shipped by Fan Modules Shipped by
Their Types Default Default

QFX5120- • 8 100GbE/40GbE Two 850-W AC power supplies Five fan modules with front-to-
48YM-AFO QSFP28 that with front-to-back airflow, back airflow, indicated by the
support Media indicated by a Juniper Gold label AIR OUT and a Juniper
Access Control ejector lever. Gold handle.
Security (MACsec)

• 48 25GbE/
10GbE/1GbE
SFP28 that
support MACsec

QFX5120- • 8 100GbE/40GbE Two 850-W AC power supplies Five fan modules with back-to-
48YM-AFI QSFP28 that with back-to-front airflow, front airflow, indicated by the
support MACsec indicated by a Juniper Azure label AIR IN and a Juniper Azure
Blue ejector lever. Blue handle.
• 48 25GbE/
10GbE/1GbE
SFP28 that
support MACsec

QFX5120- • 8 100GbE/40GbE Two 850-W DC power supplies Five fan modules with front-to-
48YM-DC-AO QSFP28 that with front-to-back airflow, back airflow, indicated by the
support MACsec indicated by a Juniper Gold label AIR OUT and a Juniper
ejector lever. Gold handle.
• 48 25GbE/
10GbE/1GbE
SFP28 that
support MACsec

QFX5120- • 8 100GbE/40GbE Two 850-W DC power supplies Five fan modules with back-to-
48YM-DC-AI QSFP28 that with back-to-front airflow, front airflow, indicated by the
support MACsec indicated by a Juniper Azure label AIR IN and a Juniper Azure
Blue ejector lever. Blue handle.
• 48 25GbE/
10GbE/1GbE
SFP28 that
support MACsec
21

CAUTION: Do not mix:

• AC and DC power supplies in the same chassis.

• 650-W and 850-W power supplies in the same QFX5120-48T chassis.

• Power supplies with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Fan modules with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Power supplies and fan modules with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

QFX5120 Switch Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping

This topic describes the hardware terms used in QFX5120 switch documentation and the corresponding
terms used in the Junos OS CLI (see Table 5 on page 21).

Table 5: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in the Documentation for QFX5120 Switches

Hardware Description (CLI) Value Item in Additional Information


Item (CLI) Documentation

Chassis One of the following: – Switch chassis "QFX5120 Switch


Models and Variants"
• QFX5120- on page 17
32C

• QFX5120-
48T-CHAS

• JNP48Y8C
-CHAS

• QFX5120-
48YM-8C
22

Table 5: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in the Documentation for QFX5120 Switches (Continued)

Hardware Description (CLI) Value Item in Additional Information


Item (CLI) Documentation

Routing One of the following: • n is a value in Routing Engine –


Engine (n) the range 0
• RE-QFX5120-
through 1 for a
32C
switch that is
part of a
• RE-QFX5120-
Virtual Chassis.
48T-6C

• RE-QFX5120- • On a
standalone
48Y-8C
switch, the
• RE-QFX5120- default value is
48YM-8C 0.

FPC (n) Abbreviated name of the • n is a value in In QFX5120, Understanding


Flexible PIC Concentrator the range 0 FPC refers to Interface Naming
(FPC) through 1 for a the switch itself. Conventions
switch that is
One of the following:
part of a
• QFX5120 Virtual Chassis.
-32C
• On a
• QFX5120 standalone
-48T-CHAS switch, the
default value is
• JNP48Y8C 0.
-CHAS

• QFX5120-
48YM-8C

Xcvr (n) Abbreviated name of the n is a value Optical "QFX5120 Network


transceiver equivalent to the transceivers Cable and Transceiver
number of the Planning" on page 106
port in which the
transceiver is
installed.
23

Table 5: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in the Documentation for QFX5120 Switches (Continued)

Hardware Description (CLI) Value Item in Additional Information


Item (CLI) Documentation

Fan tray (n) QFX5120-32C Fan module "QFX5120 Cooling


System" on page 44

One of the following: n has a value 0


through 5,
• QFX5120-32C Fan Tray corresponding to
n, Front to Back Airflow the fan module
- AFO slot number.

• QFX5120-32C Fan Tray


n, Back to Front Airflow
- AFI

QFX5120-48T

One of the following: n has a value 0


through 4,
• Fan-board Fan Tray n, corresponding to
Front to Back Airflow - the fan module
AFO slot number.

• Fan-board Fan Tray n,


Back to Front Airflow -
AFI

QFX5120-48Y

One of the following: n has a value 0


through 4,
• fan-ctrl-n, Front to Back corresponding to
Airflow - AFO the fan module
slot number.
• fan-ctrl-n, Back to Front
Airflow - AFI

QFX5120-48YM
24

Table 5: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in the Documentation for QFX5120 Switches (Continued)

Hardware Description (CLI) Value Item in Additional Information


Item (CLI) Documentation

One of the following: n has a value 0


through 4,
• Fan-board Fan Tray n, corresponding to
Front to Back Airflow - the fan module
AFO slot number.

• Fan-board Fan Tray n,


Back to Front Airflow -
AFI

Power Supply QFX5120-32C n has a value 0 Power supply "QFX5120 Power


(n) through 1, System" on page 58
One of the following: corresponding to
the power supply
• QFX520048Y
slot number.
-650W-AC
-AFI

• QFX520048Y
-650W-AC
-AFO
25

Table 5: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in the Documentation for QFX5120 Switches (Continued)

Hardware Description (CLI) Value Item in Additional Information


Item (CLI) Documentation

QFX5120-48T

One of the following:

• JPSU
-650W-AC
-AO

• JPSU
-650W-AC
-AI

• JPSU
-850W-HV
-AFO

• JPSU
-850W-HV
-AFI

• JPSU
-650W-DC
-AFO

• JPSU
-650W-DC
-AFI
26

Table 5: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in the Documentation for QFX5120 Switches (Continued)

Hardware Description (CLI) Value Item in Additional Information


Item (CLI) Documentation

QFX5120-48Y

One of the following:

• JPSU
-650W-AC
-AO

• JPSU
-650W-AC
-AI

• JPSU
-650W-DC
-AFO

• JPSU
-650W-DC
-AFI

QFX5120-48YM

One of the following:

• JPSU
-850W-AC
-AFO

• JPSU
-850W-AC
-AFI

• JPSU
-850W-DC
-AFO

• JPSU
-850W-DC
-AFI
27

CAUTION: Do not mix:

• AC and DC power supplies in the same chassis.

• 650-W and 850-W power supplies in the same QFX5120-48T chassis.

• Power supplies with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Fan modules with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Fan modules and power supplies with different airflow directions in the same
chassis.

QFX5120 Chassis

IN THIS SECTION

Chassis Physical Specifications for QFX5120 Switches | 27

Field-Replaceable Units in QFX5120 Switches | 28

Chassis Status LEDs in QFX5120 Switches | 29

LEDs on the Management Port on QFX5120 Switches | 33

Network Port LEDs on QFX5120 Switches | 36

Chassis Physical Specifications for QFX5120 Switches

The QFX5120 switch chassis is a rigid sheet-metal structure that houses all components of the switch.
Table 6 on page 28 shows the physical specifications of the QFX5120 switch models.
28

Table 6: Physical Specifications of the QFX5120 Switch Models

Model Height Width Depth Weight

QFX5120-32C 1.7 in. 17.26 in. (43.84 cm) 20.27 in. (51.5 cm) 21.12 lb (9.58 kg)
(4.33 cm) excluding fan and with two power
power supply supplies and fans
handles installed

QFX5120-48T 1.72 in. • 17.36 in. (44.09 cm) 20.48 in. (52.02 cm) 24.25 lb (11 kg) with
(4.37 cm) excluding fan and two power supplies
• The outer edges of the power supply and fans installed
front-mounting brackets handles
extend the width to 19 in.
(48.2 cm)

QFX5120-48Y 1.72 in. • 17.36 in. (44.09 cm) 20.48 in. (52.02 cm) 23.7 lb (10.75 kg)
(4.37 cm) excluding fan and with two power
• The outer edges of the power supply supplies and fans
front-mounting brackets handles installed
extend the width to 19 in.
(48.2 cm)

QFX5120-48YM 1.72 in. • 17.36 in. (44.09 cm) 20.48 in. (52.02 cm) 24.8 lb (11.25 kg)
(4.37 cm) excluding fan and with two power
• The outer edges of the power supply supplies and fans
front-mounting brackets handles installed
extend the width to 19 in.
(48.2 cm)

Field-Replaceable Units in QFX5120 Switches

Field-replaceable units (FRUs) are components that you can replace at your site. The FRUs in QFX5120
switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable: You can remove and replace them without powering off
the switch or disrupting switch functions. The QFX5120 switches have the following FRUs:

• Power supplies

• Fan modules
29

• Transceivers

NOTE: Transceivers are not part of the shipping configuration. If you want to purchase any of
these components, you must order them separately.

NOTE: If you have a Juniper J-Care service contract, register any addition, change, or upgrade of
hardware components at https://www.juniper.net/customers/support/tools/updateinstallbase/.
Failure to do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts. This note does not
apply if you replace existing components with the same type of component.

Chassis Status LEDs in QFX5120 Switches

The rear panel of QFX5120-32C switches has a chassis ID LED labeled ID (see Figure 23 on page 29).

Figure 23: Chassis ID LED on a QFX5120-32C Switch

1— Chassis ID LED (labeled ID)

Table 7 on page 29 describes the chassis ID LED on QFX5120-32C switches, its color and states, and
the status they indicate.

Table 7: Chassis ID LED on QFX5120-32C Switches

LED Label Color State and Description

ID Amber Blinking—The beacon feature is enabled on the switch.


30

Table 7: Chassis ID LED on QFX5120-32C Switches (Continued)

LED Label Color State and Description

Unlit The beacon feature is not enabled on the switch. You can enable the
beacon feature by using the request chassis beacon command.

The rear panel of QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches has four chassis status
LEDs labeled ALM, SYS, MST, and ID (see Figure 24 on page 30, Figure 25 on page 30, and Figure 26
on page 31).

Figure 24: Chassis Status LEDs on QFX5120-48T Switches

1— Chassis status LEDs (labeled ALM, SYS, MST,


and ID)

Figure 25: Chassis Status LEDs on QFX5120-48Y Switches

1— Chassis status LEDs (labeled ALM, SYS, MST,


and ID)
31

Figure 26: Chassis Status LEDs on QFX5120-48YM Switches

1— Chassis status LEDs (labeled ALM, SYS, MST,


and ID)

Table 8 on page 31 describes the chassis status LEDs on QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and
QFX5120-48YM switches, their colors and states, and the status they indicate.

Table 8: Chassis Status LEDs on QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM Switches

LED Label Color State and Description

ALM Red There is a major hardware fault, such as a temperature alarm or a


power failure alarm, and the switch is halted.

A major alarm indicates a critical error condition that requires


immediate action. See Chassis Component Alarm Conditions on
QFX5120 Switches.

Amber There is a minor alarm such as a software or a hardware error.


Power off the switch and then power it on. Monitor the switch to
see if it is working properly.

A minor alarm indicates a noncritical condition that requires


monitoring or maintenance. A minor alarm that is left unchecked
might cause interruption in service or performance degradation.

Unlit There is no alarm or the switch is halted.


32

Table 8: Chassis Status LEDs on QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM Switches


(Continued)

LED Label Color State and Description

SYS Green On steadily—Junos OS for QFX Series switches is loaded on the


switch.

Blinking—The switch is a member in a QFX Series Virtual Chassis


configuration.

Unlit The switch is powered off or is halted.

MST Green In a standalone QFX5120 switch: On steadily—The switch is


functioning normally as the primary switch.

In a Virtual Chassis configuration:

• On steadily—The switch is functioning normally and is the


primary switch.

• Blinking—The switch is functioning normally and is the backup.

Unlit • In a standalone QFX5120 switch: The switch is powered off or


halted.

• In a Virtual Chassis configuration: The switch is a linecard


member.

ID Blue Blinking—The beacon feature is enabled on the switch.

Unlit The beacon feature is not enabled on the switch. You can enable
the beacon feature by using the request chassis beacon command.
33

LEDs on the Management Port on QFX5120 Switches

QFX5120-32C switches have one management port on the front panel. Figure 27 on page 33 shows
the location of the management port on the QFX5120-32C and the LED on the port. The LED indicates
link activity of the port. Table 9 on page 33 describes the LED on the management port on
QFX5120-32C switches.

QFX5120-48T switches have one management port on the rear panel. Figure 28 on page 34 shows the
location of the management port on the QFX5120-48T and the LEDs on the port. The LEDs indicate
link activity and status of the port. Table 10 on page 35 describes the LEDs on the management port
on QFX5120-48T switches.

QFX5120-48Y switches have two management ports on the rear panel. Figure 29 on page 34 shows
the location of the management ports on the QFX5120-48Y and the LEDs on the ports. The LEDs
indicate link activity and status of the port. Table 10 on page 35 describes the LEDs on the
management ports on QFX5120-48Y switches.

QFX5120-48YM switches have two management ports on the rear panel. Figure 30 on page 35 shows
the location of the management ports on the QFX5120-48YM and the LEDs on the ports. The LEDs
indicate link activity and status of the port. Table 10 on page 35 describes the LEDs on the
management ports on QFX5120-48YM switches.

Figure 27: Location of the Management Port on QFX5120-32C Switches and the LED on the Port

1— Link activity LED

Table 9: LED on the Management Port on QFX5120-32C Switches

LED Color State and Description

Link activity Green On steadily—The port and the link are active, but there is no link
activity.
34

Table 9: LED on the Management Port on QFX5120-32C Switches (Continued)

LED Color State and Description

Blinking—The port and the link are active and there is link activity.

Unlit The port is administratively disabled, there is no power, the link is


down, or there is a fault.

Figure 28: Location of the Management Port on QFX5120-48T Switches and the LEDs on the Port

1— Status LED 2— Link activity LED

Figure 29: Location of the Management Ports on QFX5120-48Y Switches and the LEDs on the Port

1— Status LED 2— Link activity LED


35

Figure 30: Location of the Management Ports on QFX5120-48YM Switches and the LEDs on the Port

1— Status LED 2— Link activity LED

Table 10: LEDs on the Management Ports on QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM
Switches

LED Color State and Description

Link activity Green On steadily—The port and the link are active, but there is no link
activity.

Blinking—The port and the link are active and there is link activity.

Unlit The port is administratively disabled, there is no power, the link is


down, or there is a fault.

Status Green On steadily—The link speed is 1000 Mbps.

Yellow On steadily—The link speed is 100 Mbps.

Unlit Either the port speed is 10 Mbps or the link is down.


36

Network Port LEDs on QFX5120 Switches

IN THIS SECTION

Network Port LEDs on QFX5120-32C Switches | 36

Network Port LEDs on QFX5120-48T Switches | 38

Network Port LEDs on QFX5120-48Y Switches | 40

Network Port LEDs on QFX5120-48YM Switches | 43

Network Port LEDs on QFX5120-32C Switches

Each SFP+ port on QFX5120-32C switches has one LED that shows the link activity of the port (see
Figure 31 on page 36). See Table 11 on page 36 to learn more about that LED.

Each QSFP28 port on QFX5120-32C switches has four LEDs that show the link activity of the port (see
Figure 32 on page 37). The first LED operates when the port is not channelized; the other three LEDs
operate when the port is channelized. See Table 12 on page 37 to learn more about those LEDs.

Figure 31: LED on the SFP+ Ports on QFX5120-32C Switches

1— LED for the SFP+ port 32 2— LED for the SFP+ port 33

Table 11: LED on the SFP+ Ports on QFX5120-32C Switches

Color State and Description

Green On steadily—The port and the link are active, but there is no link activity.
37

Table 11: LED on the SFP+ Ports on QFX5120-32C Switches (Continued)

Color State and Description

Blinking—The port and the link are active and there is link activity.

Unlit The port is not active.

Figure 32: LEDs on the QSFP28 Ports on QFX5120-32C Switches

1— LEDs on the QSFP28 ports

Table 12: LEDs on the QSFP28 Ports on QFX5120-32C Switches

Position Color State Description

1 Green On steadily The port is not channelized, a 100 -Gbps or 40 -Gbps link
is established, but there is no link activity. When this LED
is on, the LEDs in positions 2 through 4 are off.

Blinking The port is not channelized, a 100 -Gbps or 40 -Gbps link


is established, and there is link activity.

1–4 Green On steadily The port is channelized, a 25-Gbps or 10-Gbps link is


established, but there is no link activity.
38

Table 12: LEDs on the QSFP28 Ports on QFX5120-32C Switches (Continued)

Position Color State Description

Blinking The port is channelized, a 25-Gbps or 10-Gbps link is


established, and there is link activity.

1–4 Unlit Unlit The port is administratively disabled, there is no power,


the link is down, or there is a fault.

Network Port LEDs on QFX5120-48T Switches

Each BASE-T port on QFX5120-48T switches has one LED that indicates the status of the port (see
Figure 33 on page 38). See Table 13 on page 38 to learn more about that LED.

Each QSFP28 port on QFX5120-48T switches has one LED that indicates the status of the port (see
Figure 34 on page 39). See Table 14 on page 40 to learn more about that LED.

Figure 33: LEDs on the 10-GbE BASE-T Ports on QFX5120-48T Switches

1— LED for the BASE-T ports in the top row 2— LED for the BASE-T ports in the bottom row

Table 13: LEDs on the BASE-T Ports on QFX5120-48T Switches

Color State and Description

Green On steadily—The port is operating at 10-Gbps speed, but there is no link activity.
39

Table 13: LEDs on the BASE-T Ports on QFX5120-48T Switches (Continued)

Color State and Description

Blinking—The port is operating at 10-Gbps speed and there is link activity.

Amber On steadily—The port is operating at 1-Gbps speed, but there is no link activity.

Blinking—The port is operating at 1-Gbps speed and there is link activity.

Blipping—The beacon function is enabled on the port.

Unlit The port is administratively disabled, there is no power, the link is down, or there is a fault.

Figure 34: LED on the QSFP28 Ports on QFX5120-48T Switches

1— LED for the QSFP28 ports in the top row 2— LED for the QSFP28 ports in the bottom row
40

Table 14: LED on the QSFP28 Ports on QFX5120-48T Switches

Color State and Description

Green When the port is not channelized and is configured to operate as one 100GbE or 40GbE
interface:

• On steadily—The port is operational, but there is no link activity.

• Blinking—The port is operational and there is link activity.

When the port is channelized and is configured to operate as two 50GbE interfaces:

• On steadily—The port is operational, both the interfaces are operational, but there is
no link activity.

• Blinking—The port is operational and there is link activity on at least one of the
interfaces.

When the ports 50 and 51 are channelized and are configured to operate as four 25GbE
or 10GbE interfaces:

• On steadily—All four breakout links are established, but there is no link activity on any
of the channelized interfaces.

• Blinking—All four breakout links are established and there is link activity on at least
one of the channelized interfaces.

Amber When the port is channelized and is configured to operate as two 50GbE interfaces:

• Blipping—The beacon function is enabled on the port.

Unlit The port is administratively disabled, there is no power, the link is down, or there is a fault.

Network Port LEDs on QFX5120-48Y Switches

Each SFP28 port on QFX5120-48Y switches has two LEDs that show the link activity and status of the
port (see Figure 35 on page 41). See Table 15 on page 41 to learn more about those LEDs.

Each QSFP28 port on QFX5120-48Y switches has four LEDs that show the link activity of the port (see
Figure 36 on page 42). The first LED operates when the port is not channelized; the other three LEDs
operate when the port is channelized. See Table 16 on page 42 to learn more about those LEDs.
41

Figure 35: LEDs on the SFP28 Ports on QFX5120-48Y Switches

1— Link activity LED for the SFP28 ports 2— Status LED for the SFP28 ports

Table 15: LEDs on the SFP28 Ports on QFX5120-48Y Switches

LED Color State and Description

Link activity Green On steadily—The port and the link are active, but there is no link
activity.

Blinking—The port and the link are active and there is link activity.

Unlit The port is not active.

Status Green On steadily—The port is operating at 25-Gbps speed.

Blinking—The port is operating at 1-Gbps or 10-Gbps speed.


42

Figure 36: LEDs on the QSFP28 Ports on QFX5120-48Y Switches

1— LEDs on the QSFP28 ports in the top row

Table 16: LEDs on the QSFP28 Ports on QFX5120-48Y Switches

Position Color State Description

1 Green On steadily The port is not channelized, a 100 Gbps or 40 Gbps link
is established, but there is no link activity. When this
LED is on, the LEDs in positions 2 through 4 are off.

Blinking The port is not channelized, a 100 Gbps or 40 Gbps link


is established, and there is link activity.

1–4 Green On steadily The port is channelized, a 25-Gbps or 10-Gbps link is


established, but there is no link activity.

Blinking The port is channelized, a 25-Gbps or 10-Gbps link is


established, and there is link activity.

All Amber Blinking The beacon function is enabled on the port.

1–4 Unlit Unlit The port is administratively disabled, there is no power,


the link is down, or there is a fault.
43

Network Port LEDs on QFX5120-48YM Switches

Each SFP28 port on QFX5120-48YM switches has one LED that shows the link activity and status of
the port (see Figure 37 on page 43). See Table 17 on page 43 to learn more about that LED.

Each QSFP28 port on QFX5120-48YM switches has one LED that shows the link activity and status of
the port (see Figure 38 on page 44). See Table 18 on page 44 to learn more about those LEDs.

Figure 37: LED on the SFP28 Ports on QFX5120-48YM Switches

1— LED on the SFP28 ports on QFX5120-48YM


switches

Table 17: LED on the SFP28 Ports on QFX5120-48YM Switches

Color State and Description

Green On steadily—A link is established, but there is no link activity.

Blinking—A link is established and there is link activity.

Yellow Blinking—The beacon function is enabled on the port.

Unlit The port is administratively disabled, there is no power, the link is down, or there is a fault.
44

Figure 38: LED on the QSFP28 Ports on QFX5120-48YM Switches

1— LED on the QSFP28 ports on


QFX5120-48YM switches

Table 18: LED on the QSFP28 Ports on QFX5120-48YM Switches

Color State Description

Green On steadily A link is established, but there is no link activity.

Blinking A link is established and there is link activity.

Yellow Blinking The beacon function is enabled on the port.

Unlit Unlit The port is administratively disabled, there is no power, the link is
down, or there is a fault.

QFX5120 Cooling System

IN THIS SECTION

Fan Modules for QFX5120 Switches | 45

QFX5120 Models and Airflow Direction | 47

QFX5120 Models with Front-to-Back Airflow | 51

QFX5120 Models with Back-to-Front Airflow | 53


45

How to Position the Switch | 56

QFX5120 Fan Module Status | 57

The cooling system in QFX5120 switches consists of fan modules and built-in fans in the power
supplies. The airflow direction depends on the fan modules and power supplies installed in the switch.
You can order a QFX5120 switch that supports front-to-back airflow (air enters through the front of the
switch) or back-to-front airflow (air enters through the back of the switch).

The fan modules are hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable units (FRUs) installed in the rear
panel of the switch: You can remove and replace them without powering off the switch or disrupting
switch functions.

Fan Modules for QFX5120 Switches

We ship QFX5120-32C switches with six fan modules (5+1 redundancy) preinstalled in the rear panel.
We ship QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches with five fan modules (4+1
redundancy) preinstalled in the rear panel.

The fan modules are available in two models that have different airflow directions:

• Front-to-back (cold air enters through the front of the switch and hot air exhausts through the back
of the switch), indicated by the label F2B and red handle in QFX5120-32C switches and by the label
AIR OUT and Juniper Gold handle in QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches.

• Back-to-front (cold air enters through the back of the switch and hot air exhausts through the front),
indicated by the label B2F and blue handle in QFX5120-32C switches and by the label AIR IN and
Juniper Azure Blue handle in QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches.

Figure 39 on page 46 shows the fan module for QFX5120-32C switches.


46

Figure 39: Fan Module for QFX5120-32C Switches

The fan module slots on the switch chassis are numbered 0 through 5 from left to right and have an
arrow-shaped LED each next to them.

Figure 40 on page 46 shows the fan module for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM
switches.

Figure 40: Fan Module for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM Switches

The fan module slots on the switch chassis are numbered 0 through 4 from left to right and have a fan
icon and a round LED each next to them.

NOTE: You must install all the fan modules for optimal functioning of the switch.
47

If the switch is operational while you are replacing fan modules, you must remove only one fan module
at a time. The switch continues to operate for 30 seconds without thermal shutdown while you are
replacing a fan module.

QFX5120 Models and Airflow Direction

Table 19 on page 47 shows the airflow direction in QFX5120 switch models.

Table 19: Airflow Direction in QFX5120 Switch Models

Model Number Fan Model Number Fan Modules and Power Direction of Airflow in the Fan
Supplies Modules and Power Supplies

QFX5120- QFX520048Y-FAN- We ship the switch with six Front-to-back—Cold air intake
32C-AFO AO fan modules (with front-to- to cool the chassis is through
back airflow, indicated by the the vents on the front panel of
label F2B and a red handle) the chassis, and hot air
and two AC power supplies exhausts through the vents on
(with a red ejector lever). the rear panel of the chassis.

QFX5120- QFX520048Y-FAN- We ship the switch with six Back-to-front—Cold air intake
32C-AFI AI fan modules (with front-to- to cool the chassis is through
back airflow, indicated by the the vents on the rear panel of
label B2F and a blue handle) the chassis, and hot air
and two AC power supplies exhausts through the vents on
(with a blue ejector lever). the front panel of the chassis.

QFX5120- QFX520048Y-FAN- We ship the switch with six Front-to-back—Cold air intake
32C-DC-AFO AO fan modules (with front-to- to cool the chassis is through
back airflow, indicated by the the vents on the front panel of
label F2B and a red handle) the chassis, and hot air
and two DC power supplies exhausts through the vents on
(with a red ejector lever). the rear panel of the chassis.

QFX5120- QFX520048Y-FAN- We ship the switch with six Back-to-front—Cold air intake
32C-DC-AFI AI fan modules (with front-to- to cool the chassis is through
back airflow, indicated by the the vents on the rear panel of
label B2F and a blue handle) the chassis, and hot air
and two DC power supplies exhausts through the vents on
(with a blue ejector lever). the front panel of the chassis.
48

Table 19: Airflow Direction in QFX5120 Switch Models (Continued)

Model Number Fan Model Number Fan Modules and Power Direction of Airflow in the Fan
Supplies Modules and Power Supplies

QFX5120- QFX5110-FANAFO We ship the switch with five Front-to-back—Cold air intake
48T-AFO fan modules (with the label to cool the chassis is through
AIR OUT) and two AC power the vents on the front panel of
supplies (with a Juniper Gold the chassis, and hot air
handle). exhausts through the vents on
the rear panel of the chassis.

QFX5120- QFX5110-FANAFI We ship the switch with five Back-to-front—Cold air intake
48T-AFI fan modules (with the label to cool the chassis is through
AIR IN) and two AC power the vents on the rear panel of
supplies (with a Juniper the chassis, and hot air
Azure Blue handle). exhausts through the vents on
the front panel of the chassis.

QFX5120- QFX5110-FANAFO We ship the switch with five Front-to-back—Cold air intake
48T-DC-AFO fan modules (with the label to cool the chassis is through
AIR OUT) and two DC power the vents on the front panel of
supplies (with a Juniper Gold the chassis, and hot air
handle). exhausts through the vents on
the rear panel of the chassis.

QFX5120- QFX5110-FANAFI We ship the switch with five Back-to-front—Cold air intake
48T-DC-AFI fan modules (with the label to cool the chassis is through
AIR IN) and two DC power the vents on the rear panel of
supplies (with a Juniper the chassis, and hot air
Azure Blue handle). exhausts through the vents on
the front panel of the chassis.

QFX5120- QFX5110-FANAFO We ship the switch with five Front-to-back—Cold air intake
48Y-AFO2 fan modules (with the label to cool the chassis is through
AIR OUT) and two AC power the vents on the front panel of
supplies (with a Juniper Gold the chassis, and hot air
handle). exhausts through the vents on
the rear panel of the chassis.
49

Table 19: Airflow Direction in QFX5120 Switch Models (Continued)

Model Number Fan Model Number Fan Modules and Power Direction of Airflow in the Fan
Supplies Modules and Power Supplies

QFX5120- QFX5110-FANAFI We ship the switch with five Back-to-front—Cold air intake
48Y-AFI2 fan modules (with the label to cool the chassis is through
AIR IN) and two AC power the vents on the rear panel of
supplies (with a Juniper the chassis, and hot air
Azure Blue handle). exhausts through the vents on
the front panel of the chassis.

QFX5120- QFX5110-FANAFO We ship the switch with five Front-to-back—Cold air intake
48Y-DC-AFO2 fan modules (with the label to cool the chassis is through
AIR OUT) and two DC power the vents on the front panel of
supplies (with a Juniper Gold the chassis, and hot air
handle). exhausts through the vents on
the rear panel of the chassis.

QFX5120- QFX5110-FANAFI We ship the switch with five Back-to-front—Cold air intake
48Y-DC-AFI2 fan modules (with the label to cool the chassis is through
AIR IN) and two DC power the vents on the rear panel of
supplies (with a Juniper the chassis, and hot air
Azure Blue handle). exhausts through the vents on
the front panel of the chassis.

QFX5120- QFX5110-FANAFO We ship the switch with five Front-to-back—Cold air intake
48YM-AFO fan modules (with the label to cool the chassis is through
AIR OUT) and two AC power the vents on the front panel of
supplies (with a Juniper Gold the chassis, and hot air
handle). exhausts through the vents on
the rear panel of the chassis.

QFX5120- QFX5110-FANAFI We ship the switch with five Back-to-front—Cold air intake
48YM-AFI fan modules (with the label to cool the chassis is through
AIR IN) and two AC power the vents on the rear panel of
supplies (with a Juniper the chassis, and hot air
Azure Blue handle). exhausts through the vents on
the front panel of the chassis.
50

Table 19: Airflow Direction in QFX5120 Switch Models (Continued)

Model Number Fan Model Number Fan Modules and Power Direction of Airflow in the Fan
Supplies Modules and Power Supplies

QFX5120- QFX5110-FANAFO We ship the switch with five Front-to-back—Cold air intake
48YM-DC-AO fan modules (with the label to cool the chassis is through
AIR OUT) and two DC power the vents on the front panel of
supplies (with a Juniper Gold the chassis, and hot air
handle). exhausts through the vents on
the rear panel of the chassis.

QFX5120- QFX5110-FANAFI We ship the switch with five Back-to-front—Cold air intake
48YM-DC-AI fan modules (with the label to cool the chassis is through
AIR IN) and two DC power the vents on the rear panel of
supplies (with a Juniper the chassis, and hot air
Azure Blue handle). exhausts through the vents on
the front panel of the chassis.

CAUTION: Do not mix:

• Power supplies with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Fan modules with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Power supplies and fan modules with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

Mixing components with different airflow directions in the same chassis hampers the
performance of the cooling system of the switch and leads to overheating of the
chassis.

If you install power supplies or fan modules with different airflow directions, Junos OS
raises an alarm.

Under normal operating conditions, the fan modules operate at a moderate speed.
Temperature sensors in the chassis monitor the temperature within the chassis.

If a fan module fails or if the ambient temperature inside the chassis rises above the
acceptable range, Junos OS raises an alarm. If the temperature inside the chassis rises
above the threshold temperature, the system shuts down automatically.
51

QFX5120 Models with Front-to-Back Airflow

In the QFX5120 switch models that have front-to-back airflow, the cold air intake to cool the chassis is
through the vents on the front panel of the switch and hot air exhausts through the vents on the rear
panel.

Figure 41 on page 51 shows the front-to-back airflow through the QFX5120-32C switch chassis.

Figure 41: Front-to-Back Airflow Through the QFX5120-32C Switch Chassis

Figure 42 on page 52 shows the front-to-back airflow through the QFX5120-48T switch chassis.
52

Figure 42: Front-to-Back Airflow Through the QFX5120-48T Switch Chassis

Figure 43 on page 52 shows the front-to-back airflow through the QFX5120-48Y switch chassis.

Figure 43: Front-to-Back Airflow Through the QFX5120-48Y Switch Chassis

Figure 44 on page 53 shows the front-to-back airflow through the QFX5120-48YM switch chassis.
53

Figure 44: Front-to-Back Airflow Through the QFX5120-48YM Switch Chassis

QFX5120 Models with Back-to-Front Airflow

In the QFX5120 switch models that have back-to-front airflow, the cold air intake to cool the chassis is
through the vents on the rear panel and hot air exhausts through the vents on the front panel of the
switch.

Figure 45 on page 54 shows the back-to-front airflow through the QFX5120-32C switch chassis.
54

Figure 45: Back-to-Front Airflow Through the QFX5120-32C Switch Chassis

Figure 46 on page 54 shows the back-to-front airflow through the QFX5120-48T switch chassis.

Figure 46: Back-to-Front Airflow Through the QFX5120-48T Switch Chassis


55

Figure 47 on page 55 shows the back-to-front airflow through the QFX5120-48Y switch chassis.

Figure 47: Back-to-Front Airflow Through the QFX5120-48Y Switch Chassis

Figure 48 on page 55 shows the back-to-front airflow through the QFX5120-48YM switch chassis.

Figure 48: Back-to-Front Airflow Through the QFX5120-48YM Switch Chassis


56

How to Position the Switch

In front-to-back airflow, hot air exhausts through the vents on the rear panel of the switch. In back-to-
front airflow, hot air exhausts through the vents on the front panel of the switch.

In data center deployments, position the switch in such a manner that:

• The F2B labels on the fan modules for QFX5120-32C switches and the AIR OUT labels on the fan
modules for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches are facing the hot aisle
(see Figure 49 on page 56).

Figure 49: Deployment of Switches with Front-to-Back Airflow Through the QFX5120 Switch
Chassis

• The B2F labels on the fan modules for QFX5120-32C switches and the AIR IN labels on the fan
modules for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches are facing the cold aisle
(see Figure 50 on page 57).
57

Figure 50: Deployment of Switches with Back-to-Front Airflow Through the QFX5120 Switch
Chassis

QFX5120 Fan Module Status

There is a status LED for each fan module on QFX5120 switches, next to the fan module slot on the rear
panel of the chassis, indicating the status of the fan module. Table 20 on page 57 describes the fan
module LED.

Table 20: Fan Module Status LED

LED Color State Description

Status Green On The switch has verified that the fan module is engaged,
steadily that the airflow is in the correct direction, and that the fan
module is functioning normally.

• QFX5120-32C—Red Blinking The switch has detected an error in the fan module. Either
the fan has failed or it is seated incorrectly. Replace the fan
• QFX5120-48T, module as soon as possible. To maintain proper airflow
QFX5120-48Y, and through the chassis, leave the fan module installed in the
QFX5120-48YM chassis until you are ready to replace it.
—Amber
58

QFX5120 Power System

IN THIS SECTION

AC Power Supply in QFX5120 Switches | 58

Power Supply Specifications for AC Power Supplies for QFX5120 Switches | 63

Specifications of the Power Cord for AC Power Supplies for QFX5120 Switches | 66

LEDs on the AC Power Supplies Used in QFX5120 Switches | 68

DC Power Supply in QFX5120 Switches | 71

Power Supply Specifications for DC Power Supplies for QFX5120 Switches | 78

LEDs on the DC Power Supplies Used in QFX5120 Switches | 80

High-Voltage Power Supply for QFX5120-48T Switches | 83

AC Power Supply in QFX5120 Switches

IN THIS SECTION

Characteristics of the AC Power Supply for QFX5120 Switches | 59

AC Power Supply Airflow | 62

QFX5120-32C, QFX5120-48T, and QFX5120-48Y switches support two 650-W AC or DC power


supplies. Additionally, QFX5120-48T switches support two 850-W high-voltage power supplies with AC
or DC input. QFX5120-48YM switches support two 850-W AC or DC power supplies. The power
supplies support front-to-back or back-to-front airflow. The power supplies are fully redundant, load-
sharing, and hot-removable and hot-insertable FRUs when the second power supply is installed and
running. You can remove and replace them without powering off the switch or disrupting switch
functions. We ship QFX5120 switch models with two AC or DC power supplies preinstalled in the rear
panel of the chassis. This topic describes the AC power supplies supported on QFX5120 switches.
59

CAUTION: Do not mix:

• AC and DC power supplies in the same chassis.

• 650-W and 850-W power supplies in the same QFX5120-48T chassis.

• Power supplies with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Power supplies and fan modules with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

Characteristics of the AC Power Supply for QFX5120 Switches

You can install up to two power supplies in the power supply slots in the rear panel of the QFX5120
switch chassis. On QFX5120-32C switches, the slots are labeled PS0 and PS1. On QFX5120-48T,
QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches, the slots are labeled 0 and 1 and have a power icon next
to them.

NOTE: You must install both the power supplies for optimal functioning of the switch.

If the switch is operational while you are replacing power supplies, you must remove only one power
supply at a time.

Figure 51 on page 59 shows the AC power supply for a QFX5120-32C switch.

Figure 51: AC Power Supply for QFX5120-32C Switches

1— Ejector lever 3— AC power cord inlet

2— Power supply handle

Figure 52 on page 60 shows the AC power supply for QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48Y switches.
60

Figure 52: AC Power Supply for QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48Y Switches

1— Power supply handle 3— Ejector lever

2— AC power cord inlet

Figure 53 on page 60 shows the AC power supply for QFX5120-48YM switches.

Figure 53: AC Power Supply for QFX5120-48YM Switches

1— Power supply handle 3— Ejector lever

2— AC power cord inlet 4— Power cord retainer

Table 21 on page 61 lists the specifications of the AC power supplies used in QFX5120 switches.
61

Table 21: Specifications of the AC Power Supplies Used in QFX5120 Switches

Item Specifications

Model number • QFX5120-32C: QFX520048Y-APSU-AO or QFX520048Y-


APSU-AI

• QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48Y: JPSU-650W-AC-AO or


JPSU-650W-AC-AI

• QFX5120-48YM: JPSU-850W-AC-AFO or JPSU-850W-AC-AFI

Field-replaceable unit (FRU) type Hot-insertable and hot-removable

Weight • QFX5120-32C: 2.1 lb (0.93 kg)

• QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48Y: 2.2 lb (0.98 kg)

• QFX5120-48YM: 2.3 lb (1.04 kg)

Minimum installed in chassis 1

Maximum installed in chassis 2

Power supply slots • QFX5120-32C switches—Install power supply in slots labeled


PS0 and PS1 in the rear panel of the chassis.

• QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches—


Install power supply in slots labeled 0 and 1 with a power icon
next to them in the rear panel of the chassis.

Airflow • Front-to-back, indicated by the label F2B and a red handle in


QFX5120-32C switches and by the label AIR OUT and a Juniper
Gold handle in QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and
QFX5120-48YM switches.

• Back-to-front, indicated by label B2F and a blue handle in


QFX5120-32C switches and by the label AIR IN and a Juniper
Azure Blue handle in QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and
QFX5120-48YM switches.
62

Table 21: Specifications of the AC Power Supplies Used in QFX5120 Switches (Continued)

Item Specifications

Status LEDs • QFX5120-32C switch—Bicolored LED

• QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switch—


AC, DC, and ! (fault)

To prevent electrical injury while installing or removing AC power supplies, carefully follow instructions
in "Connect Power to an AC-Powered QFX5120 Switch" on page 170 and "Maintain the QFX5120
Power System" on page 204.

AC Power Supply Airflow

Each power supply is cooled by its own internal cooling system.

CAUTION: Verify that the airflow direction in the power supplies matches the airflow
direction in the fan modules. Ensure that each power supply that you install in the
chassis has the same airflow direction. If you install power supplies with two different
airflow directions, Junos OS raises an alarm. If you need to convert the airflow direction
in a chassis, you must replace all the fan modules and power supplies with the other
airflow direction and update the installation base (see Register Products—Mandatory to
Validate SLAs).

Table 22 on page 62 lists the AC power supplies used in QFX5120 switches and the direction of
airflow in them. The power supplies have color-coded handles and labels that indicate the direction of
the airflow.

Table 22: Airflow Direction in AC Power Supplies for QFX5120 Switches

Power Supply Color of the Power Label Direction of Airflow


Supply Handle

QFX5120-32C— Red F2B Front-to-back—Cold air intake to cool


QFX520048Y- the chassis is through the vents on the
APSU-AO front panel of the chassis and hot air
exhausts through the vents on the rear
panel of the chassis.
63

Table 22: Airflow Direction in AC Power Supplies for QFX5120 Switches (Continued)

Power Supply Color of the Power Label Direction of Airflow


Supply Handle

QFX5120-48T Juniper Gold AIR OUT


and QFX5120-48Y—
JPSU-650W-AC-AO

QFX5120-48YM— Juniper Gold AIR OUT


JPSU-850W-AC-AFO

QFX5120-32C— Blue B2F Back-to-front—Cold air intake to cool


QFX520048Y- the chassis is through the vents on the
APSU-AI rear panel of the chassis and hot air
exhausts through the vents on the front
panel of the chassis.
QFX5120-48T Juniper Azure Blue AIR IN
and QFX5120-48Y—
JPSU-650W-AC-AI

QFX5120-48YM— Juniper Azure Blue AIR IN


JPSU-850W-AC-AFI

Power Supply Specifications for AC Power Supplies for QFX5120


Switches

QFX5120-32C, QFX5120-48T, and QFX5120-48Y switches support 650-W AC or DC power supplies.


Additionally, QFX5120-48T switches support two 850-W high-voltage power supplies with AC or DC
input. QFX5120-48YM switches support two 850-W AC or DC power supplies.

Table 23 on page 64 shows the power supply specifications for AC power supplies for QFX5120-32C
switches.

2
64

Table 23: Power Supply Specifications for AC Power Supplies for QFX5120-32C Switches

Item Specification

AC input voltage Operating range: 100 VAC through 240 VAC

AC input line frequency 50–60 Hz

AC input current rating • 6 A at 100 VAC

• 3.8 A at 240 VAC

Typical power consumption 191 W

Maximum power consumption 365 W

NOTE: The maximum power consumption values specified here assumes 3.5W power per 100G
optical module used.

Table 24 on page 64 shows the power supply specifications for AC power supplies for QFX5120-48T
switches.

Table 24: Power Supply Specifications for AC Power Supplies for QFX5120-48T Switches

Item Specification

AC input voltage Operating range: 100 VAC through 240 VAC

AC input line frequency 50–60 Hz

AC input current rating 5 A at 100–240 VAC

Typical power consumption 205 W


65

Table 24: Power Supply Specifications for AC Power Supplies for QFX5120-48T Switches (Continued)

Item Specification

Maximum power consumption 251 W

Table 25 on page 65 shows the power supply specifications for AC power supply for QFX5120-48Y
switches.

Table 25: Power Supply Specifications for AC Power Supplies for QFX5120-48Y Switches

Item Specification

AC input voltage Operating range: 100 VAC through 240 VAC

AC input line frequency 50–60 Hz

AC input current rating 6 A at 100–240 VAC

Typical power consumption 185 W

Maximum power consumption 283 W

Table 26 on page 65 shows the power supply specifications for AC power supply for QFX5120-48YM
switches.

Table 26: Power Supply Specifications for AC Power Supplies for QFX5120-48YM Switches

Item Specification

AC input voltage Operating range: 100 VAC through 240 VAC

AC input line frequency 50–60 Hz

AC input current rating • 7.5 A at 100 VAC

• 3 A at 240 VAC
66

Table 26: Power Supply Specifications for AC Power Supplies for QFX5120-48YM Switches
(Continued)

Item Specification

Typical power consumption 310 W, 321 W with MACsec

Maximum power consumption 446 W, 460 W with MACsec

Specifications of the Power Cord for AC Power Supplies for QFX5120


Switches

A detachable AC power cord is supplied with the AC power supplies. The coupler for AC power supplies
is type C13 as described by International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard 60320. The plug
end of the power cord fits into the power source outlet that is standard for your geographical location.

CAUTION: The AC power cord provided with each power supply is intended for use
with that power supply only and not for any other use.

NOTE: In North America, AC power cords must not exceed 4.5 meters in length, to comply with
National Electrical Code (NEC) Sections 400-8 (NFPA 75, 5-2.2) and 210-52 and Canadian
Electrical Code (CEC) Section 4-010(3). The cords supplied with the switch are in compliance.

Table 27 on page 66 lists the specifications of the AC power cord for the AC power supplies provided
for the countries and regions listed in the table.

Table 27: Specifications of the AC Power Cord for the AC Power Supplies

Country/Region Electrical Plug Standards Juniper Model Number


Specifications

Argentina 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz IRAM 2073 Type CBL-EX-PWR-C13-AR


RA/3
67

Table 27: Specifications of the AC Power Cord for the AC Power Supplies (Continued)

Country/Region Electrical Plug Standards Juniper Model Number


Specifications

Australia 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz AS/NZZS 3112 Type CBL-EX-PWR-C13-AU


SAA/3

Brazil 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz NBR 14136 Type CBL-EX-PWR-C13-BR


BR/3

China 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz GB 1002-1996 Type CBL-EX-PWR-C13-CH


PRC/3

Europe (except Italy, 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz CEE (7) VII Type VIIG CBL-EX-PWR-C13-EU
Switzerland, and
United Kingdom)

India 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz IS 1293 Type IND/3 CBL-EX-PWR-C13-IN

Israel 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz SI 32/1971 Type CBL-EX-PWR-C13-IL


IL/3G

Italy 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz CEI 23-16 Type I/3G CBL-EX-PWR-C13-IT

Japan 125 VAC, 12 A, 50 Hz SS-00259 Type VCTF CBL-EX-PWR-C13-JP


or 60 Hz

Korea 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz CEE (7) VII Type VIIGK CBL-EX-PWR-C13-KR


or 60 Hz

North America 125 VAC, 13 A, 60 Hz NEMA 5-15 Type CBL-EX-PWR-C13-US


N5-15

South Africa 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz SABS 164/1:1992 CBL-EX-PWR-C13-SA


Type ZA/13
68

Table 27: Specifications of the AC Power Cord for the AC Power Supplies (Continued)

Country/Region Electrical Plug Standards Juniper Model Number


Specifications

Switzerland 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz SEV 6534-2 Type 12G CBL-EX-PWR-C13-SZ

Taiwan 125 VAC, 11 A and NEMA 5-15P Type CBL-EX-PWR-C13-TW


15 A, 50 Hz N5-15P

United Kingdom 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz BS 1363/A Type CBL-EX-PWR-C13-UK


BS89/13

Figure 54 on page 68 illustrates the plug on the power cord for the AC power supplies for a few of the
countries or regions listed in Table 27 on page 66.

Figure 54: AC Plug Types for AC Power Supplies

LEDs on the AC Power Supplies Used in QFX5120 Switches

Figure 55 on page 69 shows the LED on the AC power supply for QFX5120-32C switches.
69

Figure 55: LED on the AC Power Supply for QFX5120-32C Switches

1— LED

Table 28 on page 69 describes the LED on the AC power supply for QFX5120-32C switches.

Table 28: LED on the AC Power Supply for QFX5120-32C Switches

Color State Description

Green On steadily The power supply is sending out power correctly.

Blinking The power supply is in standby mode.

Red On steadily An error is detected in the power supply. Replace the power supply as
soon as possible. To maintain proper airflow through the chassis, leave the
power supply installed in the chassis until you are ready to replace it.

Blinking The internal fan in the power supply has failed. Replace the power supply
as soon as possible. To maintain proper airflow through the chassis, leave
the power supply installed in the chassis until you are ready to replace it.

Unlit Unlit The power supply is disconnected from power, or the power supply is not
receiving power.

Figure 56 on page 70 shows the LEDs on the AC power supply for QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48Y
switches. Figure 57 on page 70 shows the LEDs on the AC power supply for QFX5120-48YM
switches.
70

Figure 56: LEDs on the AC Power Supply for QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48Y Switches

1— AC LED (labeled AC) 3— Fault LED (labeled !)

2— DC LED (labeled DC)

Figure 57: LEDs on the AC Power Supply for QFX5120-48YM Switches

1— AC LED (labeled AC) 3— Fault LED (labeled !)

2— DC LED (labeled DC)

Table 29 on page 70 describes the LEDs on the AC power supply for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y,
and QFX5120-48YM switches.

Table 29: LEDs on the AC Power Supply for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM
Switches

LED Label Color State Description

AC Green On steadily The power supply is receiving power.


71

Table 29: LEDs on the AC Power Supply for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM
Switches (Continued)

LED Label Color State Description

Unlit Unlit • The power supply is disconnected from power, or the


power supply is not receiving power.

• The AC power cord might not be installed properly, or the


power input voltage might not be within normal operating
range.

DC Green On steadily The power supply is sending out power correctly.

Unlit Unlit • The power supply is disconnected from power, or the


power supply is not receiving power.

• The AC power cord might not be installed properly, or the


power input voltage might not be within normal operating
range.

• The power supply might have an internal failure.

Amber On steadily An error is detected in the power supply. Replace the power
! (Fault) supply as soon as possible. To maintain proper airflow through
the chassis, leave the power supply installed in the chassis until
you are ready to replace it.

DC Power Supply in QFX5120 Switches

IN THIS SECTION

Characteristics of the DC Power Supply | 72

DC Power Supply Airflow | 77


72

QFX5120-32C, QFX5120-48T, and QFX5120-48Y switches support two 650-W AC or DC power


supplies. Additionally, QFX5120-48T switches support 850-W high-voltage power supplies with AC or
DC input. QFX5120-48YM switches support two 850-W AC or DC power supplies. The power supplies
support front-to-back or back-to-front airflow. The power supplies are fully redundant, load-sharing, and
hot-removable and hot-insertable FRUs when the second power supply is installed and running. You can
remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions. We ship
QFX5120 switch models with two AC or DC power supplies preinstalled in the rear panel of the chassis.
This topic describes the DC power supplies supported on QFX5120 switches.

CAUTION: Do not mix:

• AC and DC power supplies in the same chassis.

• 650-W and 850-W power supplies in the same QFX5120-48T chassis.

• Power supplies with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Power supplies and fan modules with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

Characteristics of the DC Power Supply

You can install up to two power supplies in the power supply slots in the rear panel of the QFX5120
switch chassis. On QFX5120-32C switches, the slots are labeled PS0 and PS1. On QFX5120-48T,
QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches, the slots are labeled 0 and 1 and have a power icon next
to them.

NOTE: You must install both the power supplies for optimal functioning of the switch.

If the switch is operational while you are replacing power supplies, you must remove only one power
supply at a time.

Figure 58 on page 73 shows the DC power supply for a QFX5120-32C switch.


73

Figure 58: DC Power Supply for QFX5120-32C Switches

Figure 59 on page 73 shows the faceplate of a DC power supply for QFX5120-32C switches.

Figure 59: Faceplate of a DC Power Supply for QFX5120-32C Switches

1— Ejector lever 3— Power supply handle

2— LED 4— Input terminals

Figure 60 on page 74 shows the DC power supply for QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48Y switches.
74

Figure 60: DC Power Supply for QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48Y Switches

1— Input terminals 3— Ejector lever

2— Protective earthing terminal 4— Power supply handle

Figure 61 on page 74 shows the DC power supply for QFX5120-48YM switches.

Figure 61: DC Power Supply for QFX5120-48YM Switches

1— Power supply handle 3— Ejector lever

2— Input terminals

Figure 62 on page 75 shows the faceplate of a DC power supply for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y,
and QFX5120-48YM switches.
75

Figure 62: Faceplate of a DC Power Supply for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM
Switches

1— Negative Input terminals 6— Fault LED (labeled !)

2— Positive Input terminals 7— Out LED (labeled OUT)

3— Terminal cover 8— In LED (labeled IN)

4— Ejector lever 9— Power supply handle

5— Protective earthing terminal

Table 30 on page 75 lists the specifications of the DC power supplies used in QFX5120 switches.

Table 30: Specifications of the DC Power Supplies Used in QFX5120 Switches

Item Specifications

Model number • QFX5120-32C: QFX520048Y-DPSU-AO and QFX520048Y-


DPSU-AI

• QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48Y: JPSU-650W-DC-AFO and


JPSU-650W-DC-AFI

• QFX5120-48YM: JPSU-850W-DC-AFO and JPSU-850W-DC-AFI

Field-replaceable unit (FRU) type Hot-insertable and hot-removable


76

Table 30: Specifications of the DC Power Supplies Used in QFX5120 Switches (Continued)

Item Specifications

Weight • QFX5120-32C: 2.2 lb (0.98 kg)

• QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48Y: 2.2 lb (0.98 kg)

• QFX5120-48YM: 2.2 lb (1 kg)

Minimum installed in chassis 1

Maximum installed in chassis 2

Power supply slots • QFX5120-32C switches—Install power supply in slots labeled PS0
and PS1 in the rear panel of the chassis.

• QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches—


Install power supply in slots labeled 0 and 1 with a power icon
next to them in the rear panel of the chassis.

Fans Internal

Airflow • Front-to-back, indicated by the label F2B and a red handle in


QFX5120-32C switches and by the label AIR OUT and a Juniper
Gold handle in QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and
QFX5120-48YM switches.

• Back-to-front, indicated by label B2F and a blue handle in


QFX5120-32C switches and by the label AIR IN and a Juniper
Azure Blue handle in QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and
QFX5120-48YM switches.

Power supply status LEDs • QFX5120-32C switch—Bi-colored LED

• QFX5120-48T switch—AC, DC, and ! (fault)

• QFX5120-48Y switch—AC, DC, and ! (fault)

• QFX5120-48YM switch—AC, DC, and ! (fault)


77

To prevent electrical injury while installing or removing DC power supplies, carefully follow instructions
in "Connect Power to a DC-Powered QFX5120 Switch" on page 173 and "Maintain the QFX5120 Power
System" on page 204.

DC Power Supply Airflow

Each power supply has its own fan and is cooled by its own internal cooling system.

CAUTION: Verify that the airflow direction in the power supplies matches the airflow
direction in the fan modules. Ensure that each power supply that you install in the
chassis has the same airflow direction. If you install power supplies with two different
airflow directions, Junos OS raises an alarm. If you need to change the airflow direction
in a chassis, you must replace all the fan modules and power supplies with the other
airflow direction and update the installation base (see Register Products—Mandatory to
Validate SLAs).

Table 31 on page 77 lists the DC power supply models and the direction of airflow in them. The power
supplies have color-coded handles and labels that indicate the direction of the airflow.

Table 31: Airflow Direction in DC Power Supplies for QFX5120 Switches

Model Color of the Power Label Direction of Airflow


Supply Handle

QFX5120-32C— Red F2B Front-to-back—Cold air intake to cool the


QFX520048Y- chassis is through the vents on the front
DC-AFO panel of the chassis and hot air exhausts
through the vents on the rear panel of
the chassis.
QFX5120-48T Juniper Gold AIR OUT
and QFX5120-48Y—
JPSU-650W-DC-AFO

QFX5120-48YM— Juniper Gold AIR OUT


JPSU-850W-DC-AFO

QFX5120-32C— Blue B2F Back-to-front—Cold air intake to cool the


QFX520048Y- chassis is through the vents on the rear
DC-AFI panel of the chassis and hot air exhausts
through the vents on the front panel of
the chassis.
78

Table 31: Airflow Direction in DC Power Supplies for QFX5120 Switches (Continued)

Model Color of the Power Label Direction of Airflow


Supply Handle

QFX5120-48T Juniper Azure Blue AIR IN


and QFX5120-48Y—
JPSU-650W-DC-AFI

QFX5120-48YM— Juniper Azure Blue AIR IN


JPSU-850W-DC-AFI

Power Supply Specifications for DC Power Supplies for QFX5120


Switches

QFX5120-32C, QFX5120-48T, and QFX5120-48Y switches support 650-W AC or DC power supplies.


Additionally, QFX5120-48T switches support two 850-W high-voltage power supplies with AC or DC
input. QFX5120-48YM switches support two 850-W AC or DC power supplies.

Table 32 on page 78 shows the power supply specifications for DC power supplies for QFX5120-32C
switches.

Table 32: Power Supply Specifications for DC Power Supplies for QFX5120-32C Switches

Item Specifications

DC input voltage • Rated operating voltage: –48 VDC through 60 VDC

• Operating voltage range: –40.8 VDC through 72 VDC

DC input current rating 16 A maximum

Typical power consumption 231 W

Maximum power consumption 493 W


79

NOTE: The maximum power consumption values specified here assumes 3.5W power per 100G
optical module used.

Table 33 on page 79 shows the power supply specifications for DC power supplies for QFX5120-48T
switches.

Table 33: Power Supply Specifications for DC Power Supplies for QFX5120-48T Switches

Item Specifications

DC input voltage • Rated operating voltage: –48 VDC through 60 VDC

• Operating voltage range: –44 VDC through 72 VDC

DC input current rating 10 A maximum

Typical power consumption 222 W

Maximum power consumption 227 W

Table 34 on page 79 shows the power supply specifications for DC power supplies for QFX5120-48Y
switches.

Table 34: Power Supply Specifications for DC Power Supplies for QFX5120-48Y Switches

Item Specifications

DC input voltage • Rated operating voltage: –48 VDC through 60 VDC

• Operating voltage range: –40.8 VDC through 72 VDC

DC input current rating 10.5 A maximum

Typical power consumption 319 W

Maximum power consumption 342 W


80

Table 35 on page 80 shows the power supply specifications for DC power supplies for
QFX5120-48YM switches.

Table 35: Power Supply Specifications for DC Power Supplies for QFX5120-48YM Switches

Item Specifications

DC input voltage • Rated operating voltage: –48 VDC through 60 VDC

• Operating voltage range: –43.2 VDC through 69 VDC

DC input current rating 16 A maximum

Typical power consumption 333 W

Maximum power consumption 356 W

LEDs on the DC Power Supplies Used in QFX5120 Switches

Figure 63 on page 80 shows the LED on the DC power supply for QFX5120-32C switches. Figure 64
on page 82 shows the LEDs on the DC power supply for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and
QFX5120-48YM switches.

Figure 63: LED on the DC Power Supply for QFX5120-32C Switches

1— LED

Table 36 on page 81 describes the LED on the DC power supply for QFX5120-32C switches.
81

Table 36: LED on the DC Power Supply for QFX5120-32C Switches

Color State Description

Green On steadily The power supply is sending out power correctly.

Blinking The power supply is in standby mode and is receiving power


at +5 V.

Alternating red/green Blinking Power supply warning. Check the logs for related messages.

Red On steadily An error is detected in the power supply. Replace the power
supply as soon as possible. To maintain proper airflow
through the chassis, leave the power supply installed in the
chassis until you are ready to replace it.

Blinking The internal fan in the power supply has failed. Replace the
power supply as soon as possible. To maintain proper airflow
through the chassis, leave the power supply installed in the
chassis until you are ready to replace it.

Unlit Unlit The power supply is disconnected from power, or the power
supply is not receiving power.
82

Figure 64: LEDs on the DC Power Supply for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM
Switches

1— In LED (labeled IN) 3— Fault LED (labeled !)

2— Out LED (labeled OUT)

CAUTION: The V+ terminals are shunted internally together, as are the V- terminals.
You can wire the same polarity terminal together from the same source to provide an
additional current path in a higher power chassis. Do not connect the terminals to
different sources.

Table 37 on page 82 describes the LEDs on the DC power supplies for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y,
and QFX5120-48YM switches.

Table 37: LEDs on the DC Power Supplies for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM
Switches

LED Label Color State Description

IN Green On steadily The power supply is receiving power.

Unlit Unlit The power supply is disconnected from power, or the


power supply is not receiving power.

OUT Green On steadily The power supply is sending out power correctly.
83

Table 37: LEDs on the DC Power Supplies for QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM
Switches (Continued)

LED Label Color State Description

Unlit Unlit The power supply is disconnected from power, or the


power supply is not sending out power correctly.

! (Fault) Amber On steadily An error is detected in the power supply. Replace the
power supply as soon as possible. To maintain proper
airflow through the chassis, leave the power supply
installed in the chassis until you are ready to replace it.

High-Voltage Power Supply for QFX5120-48T Switches

IN THIS SECTION

Characteristics of the High-Voltage Power Supply for QFX5120-48T Switches | 84

High-Voltage Power Supply Airflow | 85

Power Supply Specifications for High-Voltage Power Supplies for QFX5120-48T switches | 86

Specifications of the Power Cord for High-Voltage Power Supply for QFX5120-48T Switches | 87

LEDs on the High-Voltage Power Supply Used in QFX5120-48T Switches | 91

QFX5120 switches support two 650-W AC or DC power supplies with front-to-back or back-to-front
airflow directions. Additionally, QFX5120-48T switches support two 850-W high-voltage power
supplies with AC or DC input and front-to-back or back-to-front airflow. You must order a high-voltage
power supply separately. Power supplies for the QFX5120 switch are fully redundant, load-sharing, and
hot-removable and hot-insertable FRUs when the second power supply is installed and running. You can
remove and replace them without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions. We ship
QFX5120 switch models with two AC or DC power supplies preinstalled in the rear panel of the chassis.
This topic describes the high-voltage power supplies supported on QFX5120-48T switches.
84

CAUTION: Do not mix:

• AC and DC power supplies in the same chassis.

• 650-W and 850-W power supplies in the same QFX5120-48T chassis.

• Power supplies with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Power supplies and fan modules with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

Characteristics of the High-Voltage Power Supply for QFX5120-48T Switches

QFX5120-48T switches support two high-voltage power supplies with AC or DC input and front-to-
back or back-to-front airflow.

Figure 65 on page 84 shows the high-voltage power supply for QFX5120-48T switches.

Figure 65: High-Voltage Power Supply for QFX5120-48T Switches

1— Power supply handle 3— Ejector lever

2— Power cord inlet

You can install up to two power supplies in the power supply slots in the rear panel of the QFX5120
switch chassis. On QFX5120-48T switches, the slots are labeled 0 and 1 and have a power icon next to
them.

Table 38 on page 85 lists the specifications of the high-voltage power supplies used in QFX5120-48T
switches.
85

Table 38: Specifications of the High-Voltage Power Supplies Used in QFX5120-48T Switches

Item Specifications

Model number QFX5120-48T: JPSU-850W-HV-AFO or JPSU-850W-HV-AFI

Field-replaceable unit (FRU) type Hot-insertable and hot-removable

Weight 2.2 lb (1 kg)

Minimum installed in chassis 1

Maximum installed in chassis 2

Power supply slots Slots labeled 0 and 1 with a power icon next to them in the rear
panel of the chassis.

Fans Internal

Power supply status LEDs AC, DC, and ! (fault)

To prevent electrical injury while installing or removing power supplies, carefully follow instructions in
"Connect Power to a QFX5120-48T Switch Powered by a High-Voltage Power Supply" on page 179 and
"Maintain the QFX5120 Power System" on page 204.

High-Voltage Power Supply Airflow

Each power supply is cooled by its own internal cooling system.

The power supplies have color-coded handles that indicate the direction of the airflow. The Juniper Gold
handles and AIR OUT label on the power supplies for QFX5120-48T switches indicate front-to-back
airflow. The Juniper Azure Blue handles and AIR IN label on the power supplies for QFX5120-48T
switches indicate back-to-front airflow.

CAUTION: Verify that the airflow direction in the power supplies matches the airflow
direction in the fan modules. Ensure that each power supply that you install in the
chassis has the same airflow direction. If you install power supplies with two different
86

airflow directions, Junos OS raises an alarm. If you need to change the airflow direction
in a chassis, you must replace all the fan modules and power supplies with the other
airflow direction and update the installation base (see Register Products—Mandatory to
Validate SLAs).

Table 39 on page 86 lists the high-voltage power supplies used in QFX5120-48T switches and the
direction of airflow in them.

Table 39: Airflow Direction in High-Voltage Power Supplies for QFX5120-48T Switches

Power Supply Direction of Airflow Color of the Power Supply


Handle

JPSU-850W-HV-AFO Front-to-back—cold air intake to cool the chassis is Juniper Gold


through the vents on the front panel of the chassis and
hot air exhausts through the vents on the rear panel of
the chassis.

JPSU-850W-HV-AFI Back-to-front—cold air intake to cool the chassis is Juniper Azure Blue
through the vents on the rear panel of the chassis and
hot air exhausts through the vents on the front panel of
the chassis.

Power Supply Specifications for High-Voltage Power Supplies for QFX5120-48T


switches

Table 40 on page 86 shows the power supply specifications for the high-voltage power supplies for
QFX5120-48T switches operating with AC input.

Table 40: Power Supply Specifications for the High-Voltage Power Supplies for QFX5120-48T Switches
Operating with AC Input

Item Specification

AC input voltage Operating range: 100 VAC through 277 VAC

AC input line frequency 50–60 Hz


87

Table 40: Power Supply Specifications for the High-Voltage Power Supplies for QFX5120-48T Switches
Operating with AC Input (Continued)

Item Specification

AC input current rating • 6 A at 100 VAC

• 3 A at 277 VAC

Typical power consumption 290 W

Maximum power 440 W

Table 41 on page 87 shows the power supply specifications for the high-voltage power supplies for
QFX5120-48T switches operating with DC input.

Table 41: Power Supply Specifications for the High-Voltage Power Supplies for QFX5120-48T Switches
Operating with DC Input

Item Specification

DC input voltage Operating range: 240 VDC through 380 VDC

DC input current rating 4A

Typical power consumption 290 W

Maximum power 440 W

Specifications of the Power Cord for High-Voltage Power Supply for QFX5120-48T
Switches

You can order a detachable power cord separately for your high-voltage power supplies. The plug or
connector of the power cord fits into the power source outlet that is standard for your geographical
location.
88

CAUTION: The power cord provided with each power supply is intended for use with
that power supply only and not for any other use.

NOTE: In North America, AC power cords must not exceed 4.5 meters in length, to comply with
National Electrical Code (NEC) Sections 400-8 (NFPA 75, 5-2.2) and 210-52 and Canadian
Electrical Code (CEC) Section 4-010(3). The cords supplied with the switch are in compliance.

Table 42 on page 88 lists the specifications of the power cord for the high-voltage power supplies
provided for the countries and regions listed in the table.

Table 42: Specifications of the Power Cords for the High-Voltage Power Supplies

Locale Cord Set Rating Plug Standards Spare Juniper Model Graphic
Number

Argentina 16 A, 250 VAC IRAM 2073 Type CBL-JNP-SG4-AR


RA/3

Australia and New 15 A, 250 VAC AS/NZS 4417 CBL-JNP-SG4-AU


Zealand

Brazil 16 A, 250 VAC NBR 14136 Type CBL-JNP-SG4-BR


BR/3

China 16 A, 250 VAC GB2099 CBL-JNP-SG4-CH

Europe (except Italy, 20 A, 250 VAC CEE 7/7 STRAIGHT CBL-JNP-SG4-EU


Switzerland, and
United Kingdom)
89

Table 42: Specifications of the Power Cords for the High-Voltage Power Supplies (Continued)

Locale Cord Set Rating Plug Standards Spare Juniper Model Graphic
Number

Great Britain 13 A, 250 VAC, BS1363 CBL-JNP-SG4-UK

India 16 A, 250 VAC SANS 164-1 CBL-JNP-SG4-SA

Israel 16 A, RA, 250 VAC SI 32/1971 Type CBL-JNP-SG4-IL


IL/3G

Italy 16 A, 250 VAC CEI 23-16 CBL-JNP-SG4-IT

North America 20 A, 250 VAC C20 to Anderson CBL-JNP-SG4-C20


3-5958p4

North America 16 A, 250 VAC Locking NEMA CBL-JNP-SG4-US-L


L6-20P

North America 16 A, 250 VAC NEMA 6-20P CBL-JNP-SG4-US


90

Table 42: Specifications of the Power Cords for the High-Voltage Power Supplies (Continued)

Locale Cord Set Rating Plug Standards Spare Juniper Model Graphic
Number

North America 15 A, 277 V NEMA I7-20P CBL-JNP-SG4-


HVAC

North America 20 A, 250 V IEC 320P6W CG_CBL-


APP-400-02

South Africa 16 A, 250 VAC SANS 164-1 CBL-JNP-SG4-SA

Switzerland 16 A, 250 VAC CEI 23-50 CBL-JNP-SG4-SZ

All countries 16 A, 400 VAC You can attach a CBL-PWR2-BARE This bare cable is
plug as permitted used for connecting
by the local code. to DC power input
and is shipped
without any lug
attached. You can
attach DC
connector lugs as
permitted by the
local code.
91

Table 42: Specifications of the Power Cords for the High-Voltage Power Supplies (Continued)

Locale Cord Set Rating Plug Standards Spare Juniper Model Graphic
Number

All countries 16 A, 400 VAC You can attach a CBL-PWR2-BARE- This bare cable is
plug as permitted RA used for connecting
by the local code. to DC power input
and is shipped
without any lug
attached. You can
attach DC
connector lugs as
permitted by the
local code.

North America 30 A, 400 VAC Both the ends of CBL-PWR-SG4 Both the ends of
this cable have the this cable have the
same SAF-D-Grid same SAF-D-Grid
connector. connector.

Europe 16 A, 250 VAC IEC 316P6 CBL-JNP-


SG4-316P6

North America and 20 A, 250 VAC IEC 320P6 CBL-JNP-


Canada SG4-320P6

LEDs on the High-Voltage Power Supply Used in QFX5120-48T Switches

Figure 66 on page 92 shows the location of the LEDs on the high-voltage power supply used in
QFX5120-48T switches.
92

Figure 66: LEDs on the High-Voltage Power Supply Used in QFX5120-48T Switches

1— AC LED (labeled AC ) 3— Fault LED (labeled !)

2— DC LED (labeled DC)

Table 43 on page 92 describes the LEDs on the high-voltage power supply used in QFX5120-48T
switches.

Table 43: LEDs on the High-Voltage Power Supply Used in QFX5120-48T Switches

LED Label Color State Description

AC Green On steadily The power supply is receiving power.

Unlit Unlit • The power supply is disconnected from power, or the power
supply is not receiving power.

• The AC power cord or DC input cables might not be installed


properly, or the power input voltage might not be within
normal operating range.

DC Green On steadily The power supply is sending out power correctly.

Unlit Unlit • The power supply is disconnected from power, or the power
supply is not receiving power.

• The AC power cord or DC input cables might not be installed


properly, or the power input voltage might not be within
normal operating range.

• The power supply might have an internal failure.


93

Table 43: LEDs on the High-Voltage Power Supply Used in QFX5120-48T Switches (Continued)

LED Label Color State Description

! (Fault) Amber On steadily An error is detected in the power supply. Replace the power
supply as soon as possible. To maintain proper airflow through
the chassis, leave the power supply installed in the chassis until
you are ready to replace it.
2 CHAPTER

Site Planning, Preparation, and


Specifications

Site Preparation Checklist for QFX5120 Switches | 95

QFX5120 Site Guidelines and Requirements | 97

QFX5120 Network Cable and Transceiver Planning | 106

QFX5120 Management Cable Specifications and Pinouts | 112


95

Site Preparation Checklist for QFX5120 Switches

The checklist in Table 44 on page 95 summarizes the tasks you need to perform to prepare a site for
installing a QFX5120 switch.

Table 44: Site Preparation Checklist

Item or Task For More Information Performed by Date

Environment

Verify that environmental factors "Environmental Requirements and


such as temperature and humidity Specifications for QFX5120
do not exceed switch tolerances. Switches" on page 97

Power

Measure the distance between "Clearance Requirements for


external power sources and the Airflow and Hardware Maintenance
switch installation site. for QFX5120 Switches" on page
103

Locate sites to connect system


grounding.

Calculate the power consumption • "Power Supply Specifications for


and requirements. AC Power Supplies for
QFX5120 Switches" on page 63

• "Power Supply Specifications for


DC Power Supplies for
QFX5120 Switches" on page 78

• "High-Voltage Power Supply for


QFX5120-48T Switches" on
page 83

Hardware Configuration
96

Table 44: Site Preparation Checklist (Continued)

Item or Task For More Information Performed by Date

Choose the number and types of "QFX5120 Switches Hardware


switches you want to install. Overview" on page 2

Rack or Cabinet

Verify that the rack or cabinet • "Rack Requirements for


meets the minimum requirements QFX5120 Switches" on page
for installing the switch. 100

• "Cabinet Requirements for


QFX5120 Switches" on page
101

Plan rack or cabinet location,


including required space
clearances.

Secure the rack or cabinet to the


floor and building structure.

Cables

Acquire cables and connectors:

• Determine the number of


cables needed based on your
planned configuration.

• Review the maximum distance


allowed for each cable. Choose
the length of the cable based
on the distance between the
hardware components being
connected.

Plan the cable routing and


management.
97

QFX5120 Site Guidelines and Requirements

IN THIS SECTION

Environmental Requirements and Specifications for QFX5120 Switches | 97

General Site Guidelines | 98

Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines | 99

Rack Requirements for QFX5120 Switches | 100

Cabinet Requirements for QFX5120 Switches | 101

Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for QFX5120 Switches | 103

Environmental Requirements and Specifications for QFX5120 Switches

You must install the switch in a rack or cabinet. It must be housed in a dry, clean, well-ventilated, and
temperature-controlled environment.

Follow these environmental guidelines:

• The site must be as dust-free as possible, because dust can clog air intake vents and filters, reducing
the efficiency of the switch cooling system.

• Maintain ambient airflow for normal switch operation. If the airflow is blocked or restricted, or if the
intake air is too warm, the switch might overheat, leading to the switch temperature monitor shutting
down the device to protect the hardware components.

Table 45 on page 97 provides the required environmental conditions for normal switch operation for
QFX5120.

Table 45: QFX5120 Environmental Tolerances

Switch Altitude Relative Humidity Temperature Seismic

QFX5120-32C No performance Normal operation • Normal operation


degradation up to ensured in relative ensured in
16,404 feet humidity range of 5%
(5000 meters)
98

Table 45: QFX5120 Environmental Tolerances (Continued)

Switch Altitude Relative Humidity Temperature Seismic

through 90%, temperature range


QFX5120-48T No performance
noncondensing of 32° F through
degradation up to
6000 feet (1829 meters) 104° F (0° C
through 40° C)

QFX5120-48Y No performance • Nonoperating


degradation up to storage
6000 feet (1829 meters) temperature in
shipping
container: –40° F
QFX5120-48Y No performance through 158° F (–
M degradation up to 40° C through
6000 feet (1829 meters) 70° C)

NOTE: Install the QFX5120 only in restricted-access areas, such as dedicated equipment rooms
and equipment closets, in accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and 110-18 of the National
Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70.

General Site Guidelines

Efficient device operation requires proper site planning and maintenance. It also requires proper layout
of the equipment, rack or cabinet, and wiring closet.

To plan and create an acceptable operating environment for your device and prevent environmentally
caused equipment failures:

• Keep the area around the chassis free from dust and conductive material, such as metal flakes.

• Follow the prescribed airflow guidelines to ensure that the cooling system functions properly. Ensure
that exhaust from other equipment does not blow into the intake vents of the device.

• Follow the prescribed electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention procedures to prevent damaging the
equipment. Static discharge can cause components to fail completely or intermittently over time.

• Install the device in a secure area, so that only authorized personnel can access the device.
99

Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines

Table 46 on page 99 describes the factors you must consider while planning the electrical wiring at
your site.

WARNING: You must provide a properly grounded and shielded environment and use
electrical surge-suppression devices.
Avertissement Vous devez établir un environnement protégé et convenablement mis à
la terre et utiliser des dispositifs de parasurtension.

Table 46: Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines

Site Wiring Guidelines


Factor

Signaling If your site experiences any of the following problems, consult experts in electrical surge
limitations suppression and shielding:

• Improperly installed wires cause radio frequency interference (RFI).

• Damage from lightning strikes occurs when wires exceed recommended distances or pass
between buildings.

• Electromagnetic pulses (EMPs) caused by lightning damage unshielded conductors and


electronic devices.

Radio To reduce or eliminate RFI from your site wiring, do the following:
frequency
interference • Use a twisted-pair cable with a good distribution of grounding conductors.

• If you must exceed the recommended distances, use a high-quality twisted-pair cable with
one ground conductor for each data signal, when applicable.

Electromagnet If your site is susceptible to problems with electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), particularly
ic from lightning or radio transmitters, seek expert advice.
compatibility
Strong sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) can cause:

• Destruction of the signal drivers and receivers in the device

• Electrical hazards as a result of power surges conducted over the lines into the equipment.
100

Rack Requirements for QFX5120 Switches

You can mount QFX5120 switches on a four-post 19-in. rack or a two-post 19-in. rack as defined in
Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (document number EIA-310-D) published by the
Electronics Industry Association.

Table 47 on page 100 provides the rack requirements and specifications for QFX5120 switches.

Table 47: Rack Requirements and Specifications for QFX5120 Switches

Rack Specifications
Requirements

Type and Use a four-post rack that provides bracket holes or hole patterns spaced at 1-U (1.75 in. or
strength 4.45 cm) increments and that meets the size and strength requirements to support the weight.

Use a two-post rack that provides bracket holes or hole patterns spaced at 1-U (1.75 in. or
4.45 cm) increments and that meets the size and strength requirements to support the weight.

A U is the standard rack unit defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment
(document number EIA-310–D) published by the Electronics Industry Association.

Size, airflow, • If you are mounting a QFX5120-32C switch, ensure that the rack has a depth of 23.6 in.
and clearance (60 cm).
requirements
• If you are mounting a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switch flush with
the front posts of a rack, ensure that the distance between the front posts and the rear
posts is between 27.5 in. (69.9 cm) and 30.5 in. (77.5 cm).

• If you are mounting a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switch in a


recessed position from the front posts of a rack, ensure that the distance between the front
posts and the rear posts is between 29.5 in. (75 cm) and 32.5 in. (82.6 cm).

• Ensure that the rack rails are spaced widely enough to accommodate the external
dimensions of the switch chassis. The outer edges of the front-mounting brackets extend
the width to 19 in. (48.26 cm).

• Route and dress all cables to minimize the blockage of airflow to and from the chassis.

• Ensure that the spacing of rails and adjacent racks allows for proper clearance around the
switch and rack.
101

Table 47: Rack Requirements and Specifications for QFX5120 Switches (Continued)

Rack Specifications
Requirements

Connection to • Secure the rack to the building structure.


building
structure • If your geographical area is earthquake-prone, secure the rack to the floor.

• Secure the rack to the ceiling brackets as well as wall or floor brackets for maximum
stability.

Cabinet Requirements for QFX5120 Switches

You can mount QFX5120 switches in a cabinet that contains a four-post 19-in. rack as defined in
Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (document number EIA-310-D) published by the
Electronics Industry Association.

Table 48 on page 101 provides the cabinet requirements and specifications for QFX5120 switches.

Table 48: Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for QFX5120 Switches

Cabinet Specifications
Requirements

Type and Use a cabinet that is at least 36 in. (91.4 cm) deep. Large cabinets improve airflow and reduce
strength the chance of overheating. The cabinet must contain a four-post rack that provides bracket
holes or hole patterns spaced at 1-U (1.75 in. or 4.45 cm) increments and that meets the size
and strength requirements to support the weight.

A U is the standard rack unit defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment
(document number EIA-310–D) published by the Electronics Industry Association.
102

Table 48: Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for QFX5120 Switches (Continued)

Cabinet Specifications
Requirements

Size, airflow, • If you are mounting a QFX5120-32C switch, ensure that the rack inside the cabinet has a
and clearance depth of 23.6 in. (60 cm).
requirements
If you are mounting a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switch flush with
the front posts of a rack inside the cabinet, ensure that the distance between the front posts
and the rear posts is between 27.50 in. (69.9 cm) and 30.5 in. (77.5 cm).

• If you are mounting a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switch in a


recessed position from the front posts of a rack inside the cabinet, ensure that the distance
between the front posts and the rear posts is between 29.50 in. (75 cm) and 32.5 in.
(82.6 cm).

• When you mount the switch in a cabinet, ensure that ventilation through the cabinet is
sufficient to prevent overheating.

• Ensure that the cold air supply you provide through the cabinet adequately dissipates the
thermal output of the switch (or switches).

• Ensure that the cabinet allows the hot exhaust air from the switch to exit the cabinet
without recirculating into the chassis. An open cabinet (without a top or doors) that employs
hot air exhaust extraction from the top allows the best airflow through the chassis. If the
cabinet contains a top or doors, perforations in these elements assist with removing the hot
air exhaust.

• The QFX5120 fans exhaust hot air either through the vents on the front panel or through
the fan modules and power supplies. Install the switch in the cabinet in a way that
maximizes the open space in front of or behind the chassis depending on the airflow
direction inside the chassis. This maximizes the clearance for critical airflow.

• Route and dress all cables to minimize the blockage of airflow to and from the chassis.

• Ensure that the spacing of rails and adjacent cabinets allows for the proper clearance around
the switch and cabinet.

Connection to • Secure the cabinet to the building structure.


building
structure • If your geographical area is earthquake-prone, secure the cabinet to the floor.

• Secure the cabinet to the ceiling brackets as well as wall or floor brackets for maximum
stability.
103

Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for


QFX5120 Switches

When planning the site for installing a QFX5120 switch, you must ensure sufficient clearance around
the switch.

• See Figure 67 on page 104 for clearance requirements for QFX5120-32C switches.

• See Figure 68 on page 104 for clearance requirements for QFX5120-48T switches.

• See Figure 69 on page 105 for clearance requirements for QFX5120-48Y switches.

• See Figure 70 on page 105 for clearance requirements for QFX5120-48YM switches.

Follow these clearance requirements:

• For the cooling system to function properly, ensure that the airflow around the chassis is
unrestricted.

• If you are mounting the switch on a rack or cabinet along with other equipment, ensure that the hot
air exhaust from other equipment does not blow into the cold air intake vents of the chassis.

• Leave at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) clearance in front of and behind the chassis for airflow.

• Leave at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) clearance on the left of the chassis for installing the grounding lug.

• NEBS GR-63 recommends that you allow at least 30 in. (76.2 cm) in front of the rack or cabinet and
24 in. (61 cm) behind the rack or cabinet.

• Leave at least 24 in. (61 cm) clearance in front of and behind the switch for service personnel to
remove and install hardware components.
104

Figure 67: Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for QFX5120-32C
Switches

Figure 68: Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for QFX5120-48T
Switches
105

Figure 69: Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for QFX5120-48Y
Switches

Figure 70: Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for QFX5120-48YM
Switches
106

QFX5120 Network Cable and Transceiver Planning

IN THIS SECTION

Pluggable Transceivers and Direct Attach Cables Supported on QFX5120 Switches | 106

Cable Specifications for QSFP+ and QSFP28 Transceivers on QFX5120 Switches | 107

How to Calculate the Fiber-Optic Cable Power Budget for QFX Series Switches | 109

How to Calculate the Fiber-Optic Cable Power Margin for QFX Series Switches | 110

Pluggable Transceivers and Direct Attach Cables Supported on QFX5120


Switches

QFX5120 switches support SFP, SFP+, SFP28, QSFP+, and QSFP28 transceivers. They also support
direct attach cables. You can find the list of transceivers supported on QFX5120 switches and
information about those transceivers at the following pages:

• QFX5120-32C—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for QFX5120-32C

• QFX5120-48T—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for QFX5120-48T

• QFX5120-48Y—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for QFX5120-48Y

• QFX5120-48YM—Hardware Compatibility Tool page for QFX5120-48YM

NOTE: We recommend that you use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased
from Juniper Networks with your Juniper Networks device.

CAUTION: The Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) provides


complete support for Juniper-supplied optical modules and cables. However, JTAC does
not provide support for third-party optical modules and cables that are not qualified or
supplied by Juniper Networks. If you face a problem running a Juniper device that uses
third-party optical modules or cables, JTAC may help you diagnose host-related issues if
the observed issue is not, in the opinion of JTAC, related to the use of the third-party
107

optical modules or cables. Your JTAC engineer will likely request that you check the
third-party optical module or cable and, if required, replace it with an equivalent
Juniper-qualified component.
Use of third-party optical modules with high-power consumption (for example,
coherent ZR or ZR+) can potentially cause thermal damage to or reduce the lifespan of
the host equipment. Any damage to the host equipment due to the use of third-party
optical modules or cables is the users’ responsibility. Juniper Networks will accept no
liability for any damage caused due to such use.

The Gigabit Ethernet transceivers installed in QFX5120 switches support digital optical monitoring
(DOM): You can view the diagnostic details for these transceivers by issuing the operational mode CLI
command show interfaces diagnostics.

Cable Specifications for QSFP+ and QSFP28 Transceivers on QFX5120


Switches

The 40GbE QSFP+ and 100GbE QSFP28 transceivers used in QFX5120 switches use 12-ribbon
multimode fiber crossover cables with MPO/UP, MPO/UPC, or MPO/APC socket connectors. The fiber
can be either OM3 or OM4. We do not sell these cables.

CAUTION: To maintain agency approvals, use only a properly constructed, shielded


cable.

TIP: Ensure that you order cables with the correct polarity. Vendors refer to these crossover
cables as key up to key up, latch up to latch up, Type B, or Method B. If you are using patch
panels between two QSFP+ ports, ensure that the proper polarity is maintained through the
cable plant.

Table 49 on page 108 describes the signals on each fiber. Table 50 on page 108 shows the pin-to-pin
connections for proper polarity.
108

Table 49: QSFP+ and QSFP28 MPO Cable Signals

Fiber Signal

1 Tx0 (Transmit)

2 Tx1 (Transmit)

3 Tx2 (Transmit)

4 Tx3 (Transmit)

5 Unused

6 Unused

7 Unused

8 Unused

9 Rx3 (Receive)

10 Rx2 (Receive)

11 Rx1 (Receive)

12 Rx0 (Receive)

Table 50: QSFP+ and QSFP28 MPO Fiber-Optic Crossover Cable Pinouts

Pin Pin

1 12

2 11
109

Table 50: QSFP+ and QSFP28 MPO Fiber-Optic Crossover Cable Pinouts (Continued)

Pin Pin

3 10

4 9

5 8

6 7

7 6

8 5

9 4

10 3

11 2

12 1

How to Calculate the Fiber-Optic Cable Power Budget for QFX Series
Switches

Calculate the fiber-optic data link's power budget when planning fiber-optic cable layout and distances
to ensure that fiber-optic connections have sufficient power for correct operation. The power budget is
the maximum amount of power the link can transmit. When you calculate the power budget, you use a
worst-case analysis to provide a margin of error, even though all the parts of an actual system do not
operate at the worst-case levels.

To calculate the worst-case estimate for the fiber-optic cable power budget (PB) for the link:
110

1. Determine values for the link's minimum transmitter power (PT) and minimum receiver sensitivity
(PR). For example, here, (PT) and (PR) are measured in decibels, and decibels are referenced to
1 milliwatt (dBm):
PT = –15 dBm

PR = –28 dBm

NOTE: See the specifications for your transmitter and receiver to find the minimum
transmitter power and minimum receiver sensitivity.

2. Calculate the power budget (PB) by subtracting (PR) from (PT):


–15 dBm – (–28 dBm) = 13 dBm

How to Calculate the Fiber-Optic Cable Power Margin for QFX Series
Switches

Before you calculate the power margin, calculate the power budget. See "How to Calculate the Fiber-
Optic Cable Power Budget for QFX Series Switches" on page 109.

Calculate the fiber-optic data link's power margin when planning fiber-optic cable layout and distances
to ensure that fiber-optic connections have sufficient signal power to overcome system losses and still
satisfy the minimum input requirements of the receiver for the required performance level. The power
margin (PM ) is the amount of power available after attenuation or link loss (LL) is subtracted from the
power budget (PB).

When you calculate the power margin, you use a worst-case analysis to provide a margin of error, even
though all the parts of an actual system do not operate at worst-case levels. A power margin (PM )
greater than zero indicates that the power budget is sufficient to operate the receiver and that it does
not exceed the maximum receiver input power. This means the link will work. A power margin (PM) that
is zero or negative indicates insufficient power to operate the receiver. See the specification for your
receiver to find the maximum receiver input power.

To calculate the worst-case estimate for the power margin (PM) for the link:

1. Determine the maximum value for link loss (LL) by adding estimated values for applicable link-loss
factors; for example, use the sample values for various factors as provided in Table 51 on page 111
(here, the link is 2 km long and multimode, and the power margin (PM) is 13 dBm).
111

Table 51: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss

Link-Loss Factor Estimated Link Loss Value Sample Link Loss Calculation Values

Higher-order mode Multimode—0.5 dBm 0.5 dBm


losses

Single-mode—None 0 dBm

Modal and chromatic Multimode—None, if the sum 0 dBm


dispersion of bandwidth and distance is
less than 500 MHz/km

Single-mode—None 0 dBm

Connector 0.5 dBm This example assumes five connectors. Loss for
five connectors: 5 (0.5 dBm) = 2.5 dBm.

Splice 0.5 dBm This example assumes two splices. Loss for two
splices: 2 (0.5 dBm) = 1 dBm.

Fiber attenuation Multimode—1 dBm/km This example assumes the link is 2 km long. Fiber
attenuation for 2 km: 2 km (1 dBm/km) = 2 dBm.

Single-mode—0.5 dBm/km This example assumes the link is 2 km long. Fiber


attenuation for 2 km: 2 km (0.5 dBm/km) = 1 dBm.

Clock Recovery Module 1 dBm 1 dBm


(CRM)

NOTE: For information about the actual amount of signal loss caused by equipment and other
factors, see your vendor documentation for that equipment.

2. Calculate the (PM) by subtracting (LL) from (PB):


PB– LL = PM

13 dBm – 0.5 dBm [HOL] – 5 x (0.5 dBm) – 2 (0.5 dBm) – 2 km (1.0 dBm/km) – 1 dB [CRM] = PM
112

13 dB m – 0.5 dBm – 2.5 dBm – 1 dBm – 2 dBm – 1 dBm = PM

PM = 6 dBm

The calculated power margin is greater than zero, indicating that the link has sufficient power for
transmission. Also, the power margin value does not exceed the maximum receiver input power.

Refer to the specifications for your receiver to find the maximum receiver input power.

QFX5120 Management Cable Specifications and


Pinouts

IN THIS SECTION

Console Port Connector Pinout Information | 112

RJ-45 Management Port Connector Pinout Information | 114

RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information | 114

RJ-45 Port, SFP Port, SFP+ Port, QSFP+ Port, and QSFP28 Port Connector Pinout Information | 115

Console Port Connector Pinout Information

The console port on a Juniper Networks device is an RS-232 serial interface that uses an RJ-45
connector to connect to a console management device. The default baud rate for the console port is
9600 baud.

Table 52 on page 113 provides the pinout information for the RJ-45 console connector.

NOTE: We no longer include the RJ-45 console cable with the DB-9 adapter as part of the
device package. If the console cable and adapter are not included in your device package, or if
you need a different type of adapter, you can order the following separately:

• RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-DB9)


113

• RJ-45 to USB-A adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBA)

• RJ-45 to USB-C adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBC)

If you want to use RJ-45 to USB-A or RJ-45 to USB-C adapter you must have X64 (64-Bit)
Virtual COM port (VCP) driver installed on your PC. See, https://ftdichip.com/drivers/vcp-
drivers/ to download the driver.

NOTE: If your laptop or desktop PC does not have a DB-9 plug connector pin and you want to
connect your laptop or desktop PC directly to a device, use a combination of the RJ-45-to-DB-9
socket adapter and a USB-to-DB-9 plug adapter. You must provide the USB-to-DB-9 plug
adapter.

Table 52: Console Port Connector Pinout Information

Pin Signal Description

1 NC No connect

2 NC No connect

3 TxD Output Transmit data

4 GND Signal ground

5 GND Signal ground

6 RxD Input Receive data

7 DCD Input Data carrier detect

8 NC No connect
114

RJ-45 Management Port Connector Pinout Information

Table 53 on page 114 provides the pinout information for the RJ-45 connector for the management port
on Juniper Networks devices.

Table 53: RJ-45 Management Port Connector Pinout Information

Pin Signal Description

1 TRP1+ Transmit/receive data pair 1

2 TRP1- Transmit/receive data pair 1

3 TRP2+ Transmit/receive data pair 2

4 TRP3+ Transmit/receive data pair 3

5 TRP3- Transmit/receive data pair 3

6 TRP2- Transmit/receive data pair 2

7 TRP4+ Transmit/receive data pair 4

8 TRP4- Transmit/receive data pair 4

RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information

The console port on a Juniper Networks device is an RS-232 serial interface that uses an RJ-45
connector to connect to a management device such as a laptop or a desktop PC. If your laptop or
desktop PC does not have a DB-9 plug connector pin and you want to connect your laptop or desktop
PC to the device, use a combination of the RJ-45 to DB-9 socket adapter along with a USB to DB-9 plug
adapter.

Table 54 on page 115 provides the pinout information for the RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter.
115

Table 54: RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information

RJ-45 pin Signal DB-9 pin Signal

1 NC 8 CTS

2 NC 6 DSR

3 TxD 2 RxD

4 GND 5 GND

6 RxD 3 TxD

7 DCD 4 DTR

8 NC 7 RTS

RJ-45 Port, SFP Port, SFP+ Port, QSFP+ Port, and QSFP28 Port
Connector Pinout Information

The tables in this topic describe the connector pinout information for the RJ-45, QSFP+, QSFP28, SFP+,
and SFP ports.

• Table 55 on page 116—10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet network port connector pinout information

• Table 56 on page 116—SFP network port connector pinout information

• Table 57 on page 118—SFP+ network port connector pinout information

• Table 58 on page 119—QSFP+ and QSFP28 network module ports connector pinout information
116

Table 55: 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Network Port Connector Pinout Information

Pin Signal Description

1 TRP1+ Transmit/receive data pair 1

Negative Vport (in PoE models)

2 TRP1- Transmit/receive data pair 1

Negative Vport (in PoE models)

3 TRP2+ Transmit/receive data pair 2

Positive Vport (in PoE models)

4 TRP3+ Transmit/receive data pair 3

5 TRP3- Transmit/receive data pair 3

6 TRP2- Transmit/receive data pair 2

Positive Vport (in PoE models)

7 TRP4+ Transmit/receive data pair 4

8 TRP4- Transmit/receive data pair 4

Table 56: SFP Network Port Connector Pinout Information

Pin Signal Description

1 VeeT Module transmitter ground

2 TX_Fault Module transmitter fault

3 TX_Disable Transmitter disabled


117

Table 56: SFP Network Port Connector Pinout Information (Continued)

Pin Signal Description

4 SDA 2-wire serial interface data line

5 SCL- 2-wire serial interface clock

6 MOD_ABS Module absent

7 RS Rate select

8 RX_LOS Receiver loss of signal indication

9 VeeR Module receiver ground

10 VeeR Module receiver ground

11 VeeR Module receiver ground

12 RD- Receiver inverted data output

13 RD+ Receiver noninverted data output

14 VeeR Module receiver ground

15 VccR Module receiver 3.3 V supply

16 VccT Module transmitter 3.3 V supply

17 VeeT Module transmitter ground

18 TD+ Transmitter noninverted data input


118

Table 56: SFP Network Port Connector Pinout Information (Continued)

Pin Signal Description

19 TD- Transmitter inverted data input

20 VeeT Module transmitter ground

Table 57: SFP+ Network Port Connector Pinout Information

Pin Signal Description

1 VeeT Module transmitter ground

2 TX_Fault Module transmitter fault

3 TX_Disable Transmitter disabled

4 SDA 2-wire serial interface data line

5 SCL- 2-wire serial interface clock

6 MOD_ABS Module absent

7 RS0 Rate select 0, optionally controls SFP+ module receiver

8 RX_LOS Receiver loss of signal indication

9 RS1 Rate select 1, optionally controls SFP+ transmitter

10 VeeR Module receiver ground

11 VeeR Module receiver ground

12 RD- Receiver inverted data output


119

Table 57: SFP+ Network Port Connector Pinout Information (Continued)

Pin Signal Description

13 RD+ Receiver noninverted data output

14 VeeR Module receiver ground

15 VccR Module receiver 3.3-V supply

16 VccT Module transmitter 3.3-V supply

17 VeeT Module transmitter ground

18 TD+ Transmitter noninverted data input

19 TD- Transmitter inverted data input

20 VeeT Module transmitter ground

Table 58: QSFP+ and QSFP28 Network Port Connector Pinout Information

Pin Signal

1 GND

2 TX2n

3 TX2p

4 GND

5 TX4n

6 TX4p
120

Table 58: QSFP+ and QSFP28 Network Port Connector Pinout Information (Continued)

Pin Signal

7 GND

8 ModSelL

9 LPMode_Reset

10 VccRx

11 SCL

12 SDA

13 GND

14 RX3p

15 RX3n

16 GND

17 RX1p

18 RX1n

19 GND

20 GND

21 RX2n
121

Table 58: QSFP+ and QSFP28 Network Port Connector Pinout Information (Continued)

Pin Signal

22 RX2p

23 GND

24 RX4n

25 RX4p

26 GND

27 ModPrsL

28 IntL

29 VccTx

30 Vcc1

31 Reserved

32 GND

33 TX3p

34 TX3n

35 GND

36 TX1p
122

Table 58: QSFP+ and QSFP28 Network Port Connector Pinout Information (Continued)

Pin Signal

37 TX1n

38 GND
3 CHAPTER

Initial Installation and Configuration

Unpack and Mount the QFX5120 Switch | 124

Connect the QFX5120 to Power | 164

Connect the QFX5120 to the Network | 181

Connect the QFX5120 to External Devices | 188

Configure Junos OS on the QFX5120 | 191


124

Unpack and Mount the QFX5120 Switch

IN THIS SECTION

Unpack the QFX5120 Switch | 124

Parts Inventory (Packing List) for a QFX5120 Switch | 125

Register Products—Mandatory to Validate SLAs | 128

Mount a QFX5120-32C Switch on a Four-Post Rack | 128

Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch in a Rack or Cabinet by Using the


JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E Rack Mount Kit | 135

Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch Flush with the Front Posts of a Rack or
Cabinet | 146

Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch in a Recessed Position from the Front
Posts of a Rack or Cabinet | 151

Mount a QFX5120-48Y Switch on a Two-Post Rack | 157

Unpack the QFX5120 Switch

We ship QFX5120 switches in a cardboard carton, secured with foam packing material.

CAUTION: QFX5120 switches are maximally protected inside the shipping carton. Do
not unpack the switches until you are ready to mount the switch.

To unpack the switch:

1. Move the shipping carton to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible, but where you
have enough room to remove the system components.
2. Position the carton so that the arrows marked on the carton are pointing up.
3. Open the top flaps on the shipping carton.
4. Pull out the packing material holding the switch in place.
5. Verify the parts received against the inventory on the label attached to the carton.
6. Save the shipping carton and packing materials in case you need to move or ship the switch later.
125

Parts Inventory (Packing List) for a QFX5120 Switch

The switch shipment includes a packing list. Check the parts you receive with the switch against the
items in the packing list. The packing list specifies the part number and provides a description of each
part in your order. The parts shipped depend on the switch model you order.

If any part in the packing list is missing, contact your customer service representative or contact Juniper
customer care from within the U.S. or Canada by telephone at 1-888-314-5822. For international-dial or
direct-dial options in countries without toll-free numbers, see https://www.juniper.net/support/
requesting-support.html .

Table 59 on page 125 lists the parts and their quantities as in the standard packing list for a QFX5120
switch.

Table 59: Inventory of Components Provided with a QFX5120 Switch

Component Quantity

Switch 1

Fan modules QFX5120-32C 6 preinstalled

QFX5120-48T, 5 preinstalled
QFX5120-48Y,
and
QFX5120-48Y
M

Power supplies 2 (AC or DC) preinstalled

AC power cords appropriate for 2


your geographical location for AC-
powered models
126

Table 59: Inventory of Components Provided with a QFX5120 Switch (Continued)

Component Quantity

Two-post rack QFX5120-32C • Front mounting brackets—2


mount kit
(QFX5120-32
• Side mounting rails—2
C-RMK,
QFX5K-2PST- • Flat head M4X8 screws to attach the front mounting brackets and side
RMK) mounting rails to the switch chassis—20

• Rear mounting (L-shaped) brackets—2

• Pan head M4X8 screws to attach the rear mounting brackets to the
side mounting rails—2

Four-post rack QFX5120-48T, JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E


mount kit QFX5120-48Y,
and • A pair of front and rear mounting rails
QFX5120-48Y
• A pair of mounting brackets
M

• JNP-4PST- • 16 flat head M4 x 6mm Phillips screws


RMK-1U-E
EX-4PST-RMK
(shipped
with the • Front mounting bracket assembly for mounting the switch flush with
switch) the front posts of a rack—2

• EX-4PST- (The front mounting bracket assembly is made up of a side rail to


RMK which an L-shaped bracket is attached.)
(seperately
orderable) • Recessed mounting brackets for mounting the switch in a recessed
position from the front posts of a rack—2

• Flat head 4x6-mm Phillips screws for attaching the front mounting
brackets to the chassis—12

• Flat head 4-40 Phillips screws for attaching recessed mounting


brackets to the side rails—6

• Rear mounting brackets—2

Documentation Roadmap 1
127

Table 59: Inventory of Components Provided with a QFX5120 Switch (Continued)

Component Quantity

End User License Agreement 1

NOTE: We no longer include the RJ-45 console cable with the DB-9 adapter as part of the
device package. If the console cable and adapter are not included in your device package, or if
you need a different type of adapter, you can order the following separately:

• RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-DB9)

• RJ-45 to USB-A adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBA)

• RJ-45 to USB-C adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBC)

If you want to use RJ-45 to USB-A or RJ-45 to USB-C adapter you must have X64 (64-Bit)
Virtual COM port (VCP) driver installed on your PC. See, https://ftdichip.com/drivers/vcp-
drivers/ to download the driver.

NOTE: You must provide the appropriate mounting screws for mounting the switch on a rack or
a cabinet.

All the rack mount kits are separately orderable.

Table 60: Rack Mount Kits for QFX5120-32C, QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, QFX5120-48YM

Model Rack Mount Kit

QFX5120-32C QFX5120-32C-RMK, QFX5K-2PST-RMK

QFX5120-48YM • JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E (shipped with the switch)

• EX-4PST-RMK (seperately orderable)


128

Table 60: Rack Mount Kits for QFX5120-32C, QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, QFX5120-48YM
(Continued)

Model Rack Mount Kit

QFX5120-48T • JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E (shipped with the switch)

• EX-4PST-RMK (seperately orderable)

QFX5120-48Y • JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E (shipped with the switch)

• EX-4PST-RMK (seperately orderable)

Register Products—Mandatory to Validate SLAs

Register all new Juniper Networks hardware products and changes to an existing installed product using
the Juniper Networks website to activate your hardware replacement service-level agreements (SLAs).

CAUTION: Register product serial numbers on the Juniper Networks website. Update
the installation base data if any addition or change to the installation base occurs or if
the installation base is moved. Juniper Networks is not responsible for not meeting the
hardware replacement service-level agreement for products that do not have registered
serial numbers or accurate installation base data.
Register your product(s) at https://tools.juniper.net/svcreg/SRegSerialNum.jsp.
Update your installation base at https://www.juniper.net/customers/csc/management/
updateinstallbase.jsp.

Mount a QFX5120-32C Switch on a Four-Post Rack

IN THIS SECTION

Mount a QFX5120-32C Switch on a Two-Post Rack | 132


129

Before mounting a QFX5120-32C switch:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in "Site Preparation Checklist for QFX5120
Switches" on page 95.

• Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance,
and secure the rack to the building structure.

• Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings, with particular attention to Chassis and Component
Lifting Guidelines.

• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage (see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

• Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see "Unpack the QFX5120 Switch" on page 124).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

• Eight sscrews to secure the mounting brackets to the rack—not provided

• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap—not provided

• Front mounting brackets—2 (provided with the rack mount kit)

• Side mounting rails—2 (provided with the rack mount kit)

• Flat head M4X8 screws to attach the front mounting brackets and side mounting rails to the switch
chassis—20 (provided with the rack mount kit)

• Rear mounting (L-shaped) brackets—2 (provided with the rack mount kit)

• Pan head M4X8 screws to attach the rear mounting brackets to the side mounting rails—2 (provided
with the rack mount kit)

You can mount a QFX5120-32C switch on four posts of a 19-in. rack or in a cabinet that contains a four-
post 19-in. rack by using a rack mount kit. (The remainder of this topic uses rack to mean rack or
cabinet.)

NOTE: One person must be available to lift the switch while another person secures the switch
to the rack.
130

CAUTION: If you are mounting multiple units on a rack, mount the heaviest unit at the
bottom of the rack, and then mount the other units from the bottom of the rack to the
top in decreasing order of the weight of the units.

To mount a QFX5120-32C switch:

1. Place the switch on a flat, stable surface.


2. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to a site ESD point.
3. Align the front mounting brackets along the side panel of the switch such that the front of the
bracket is flush with the front panel of the switch chassis. Insert the flat head M4X8 screws for
attaching the front mounting brackets into the aligned holes on the chassis and tighten the screws
(see Figure 71 on page 130).

Figure 71: Attach the Front Mounting Brackets to a QFX5120-32C Switch Chassis

4. Align the side mounting rails along the side panel of the switch. Insert the flat head M4X8 screws
for attaching the side mounting rails into the aligned holes on the chassis and tighten the screws
(see Figure 72 on page 130).

Figure 72: Attach the Side Mounting Rails to a QFX5120-32C Switch Chassis
131

5. Decide which end of the switch you want to place at the front of the rack. Position the switch so
that the F2B labels on the fan modules are facing the cold aisle, or the B2F labels on the fan
modules are facing the hot aisle.
6. Have one person grasp both sides of the switch, lift the switch, and position it in the rack, aligning
the holes of the mounting brackets with the threaded holes in the front post of the rack. Align the
bottom hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole in each rack rail, making sure that the
chassis is level.
7. Have a second person secure the front of the switch to the rack by using the screws appropriate for
your rack. Tighten the screws (see Figure 73 on page 131).

Figure 73: Secure the QFX5120-32C Switch to the Front Posts of a Rack

8. Slide the rear mounting (L-shaped) brackets on to the side mounting rails (see Figure 74 on page
132).
9. Ensure that the chassis is level. Align the holes of the rear mounting brackets with the threaded
holes in the rear post of the rack. Align the bottom hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole
in each rack rail. Align the bottom hole in both the rear mounting brackets with the bottom hole in
the front mounting brackets.
10. Secure the rear mounting brackets to the rear post of the rack by using screws appropriate for your
rack (see Figure 74 on page 132). Tighten the screws.
132

Figure 74: Secure the QFX5120-32C Switch to the Rear Post of the Rack by Using the Rear
Mounting Brackets

11. Secure the rear mounting (L-shaped) brackets to the side mounting rails by using the pan head
M4X8 screws provided (see Figure 74 on page 132). Tighten the screws.
12. Your switch is now installed on a four-post rack.

Mount a QFX5120-32C Switch on a Two-Post Rack


Before you mount a QFX5120-32C switch on a two-post rack:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in "Site Preparation Checklist for QFX5120
Switches" on page 95.

• Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance,
and secure the rack to the building structure.

• Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings, with particular attention to Chassis and Component
Lifting Guidelines.

• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage (see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

• Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see "Unpack the QFX5120 Switch" on page 124).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

• Eight screws to secure the mounting brackets to the rack—not provided

• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap—not provided

• Two-post rack mounting bracket for mounting the switch on a two-post rack—2 (provided with the
two-post rack mount kit)
133

• Flat head 4x6-mm Phillips screws for attaching the two-post rack mounting brackets to the chassis—
8 (provided with the two-post rack mount kit)

You can mount a QFX5120 switch on four posts of a four-post 19-in. rack or in a cabinet that contains a
four-post 19-in. rack, flush with the front posts, by using a four-post rack mount kit. (The remainder of
this topic uses rack to mean rack or cabinet.) You can mount QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and
QFX5120-48YM switches in a recessed position inside a four-post rack by using the recessed mounting
brackets. You can also mount QFX5120-48YM switches on a two-post rack by using a separately
orderable two-post rack mount kit.

NOTE: One person must be available to lift the switch while another person secures the switch
to the rack.

CAUTION: If you are mounting multiple units on a rack, mount the heaviest unit at the
bottom of the rack, and then mount the other units from the bottom of the rack to the
top in decreasing order of the weight of the units.

To mount a QFX5120-32C switch on a two-post rack:

1. Place the switch on a flat, stable surface.


2. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to a site ESD point.
3. Align the two-post rack mounting bracket (provided with the two-post rack mount kit) along the side
panel of the switch.
4. Insert the flat head 4x6-mm Phillips screws for attaching the two-post rack mounting brackets
(provided with the two-post rack mount kit) into the aligned holes on the chassis. Tighten the screws
(see Figure 5) .

Figure 75: Attach the Two-Post Mounting Brackets to a QFX5120-32C Switch


134

5. Decide which end of the switch you want to place at the front of the rack. Position the switch so that
the AIR IN labels on the fan modules are facing the cold aisle, or the AIR OUT labels on the fan
modules are facing the hot aisle.
6. Have one person grasp both sides of the switch, lift the switch, and position it in the rack, aligning
the holes of the mounting brackets with the threaded holes in the posts of the rack. Align the bottom
hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole in each rack rail, making sure that the chassis is level.
7. Have a second person secure the switch to the rack by using the screws appropriate for your rack.
Tighten the screws (see Figure 6).

Figure 76: Secure the QFX5120-32C Switch to the Two-Post Rack

8. Your switch is now installed on a two-post rack (see Install the QFX5120-32C Switch to the Two-
Post Rack.)

Figure 77: Mount the QFX5120-32C Switch to the Two-Post Rack


135

Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch in a


Rack or Cabinet by Using the JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E Rack Mount Kit

IN THIS SECTION

Mount the Device by Using the JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E Rack Mount Kit On a Square Hole Rack | 135

Mount the Device by Using the JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E Rack Mount Kit On a Threaded Hole Rack | 140

You can mount QFX5120-48T,QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switches on a square hole or


threaded hole four-post 19-in. racks using the partial tool less JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E rack mount kit
which is available as a spare.

JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E rack mount kit consists of the following parts:

• A pair of front and rear mounting rails

• A pair of mounting brackets

• 16 flat head M4 x 6mm Phillips screws

A four-post installation evenly supports the device by all four corners.

Mount the Device by Using the JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E Rack Mount Kit On a Square
Hole Rack
Ensure that you have the following tools and parts available:

• An ESD grounding strap—not provided.

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

• A pair of front and rear mounting rails that attach to the rack posts—provided with the rack mount kit

• A pair of mounting brackets and 16 flat head M4 x 6mm Phillips screws. These brackets attach to the
device if not pre-installed—provided with the rack mount kit

To mount the device on four posts in a rack by using the JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E rack mount kit:

1. Wrap and fasten the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and an connect the other end of the
strap to the ESD point on the device.
2. Assemble the mounting rails.

a. Slide the rear floating bracket into the front bracket. See Figure 78 on page 136.
136

Figure 78: Assemble the Mounting Rails

b. Mounting rails assembled. See Figure 79 on page 136.

Figure 79: Front and Rear Rails Assembled

3. Attach the mounting rails to the rack.

a. Align the guide blocks of the rear mounting rails with the rear-post holes. Pull the rear mounting
rails toward the front of the rack to lock the rails in place. You will hear a click sound when the
latch locks into the corresponding rack holes. See Figure 80 on page 137.
137

Figure 80: Install the Rear Floating Rails

b. Move the latch lock on the front mounting rails to open position, slide the front mounting rails,
and insert the guide blocks into the front rack posts. See Figure 81 on page 137.

Figure 81: Install the Front Mounting Rails

c. Push the lock latch to the locked position. See Figure 82 on page 138.
138

Figure 82: Front Mounting Rails Lock Latch

d. Visually ensure that the front and rear latches are locked into place on the mounting rails. See
Figure 83 on page 138.

Figure 83: Mounting Rails Installed and Locked

4. Attach mounting brackets to the device if not pre-installed. If your device already has the mounting
brackets pre-installed than skip this step and move to the next step.

a. Align the holes on the mounting bracket with the screw holes on the side panel of the chassis.

b. Insert the flat head M4 x 6mm Phillips screws to attach the mounting bracket into the aligned
holes on the chassis (see Figure 84 on page 139). Tighten the screws.
139

Figure 84: Attach the Mounting Brackets to the Device

5. Position the device in such a manner that the AIR OUT labels on components are next to the hot
aisle.
6. Grasp both sides of the device, lift it, and position the device such that the mounting rails slide into
the channels of the mounting brackets. See Figure 85 on page 139.

Figure 85: Slide the Device into the Rack

7. Tighten the two thumbscrews to secure the device. See Figure 86 on page 140.
140

Figure 86: Tighten the Thumb Screws

Mount the Device by Using the JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E Rack Mount Kit On a Threaded
Hole Rack
Ensure that you have the following tools and parts available:

• An ESD grounding strap—not provided

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

• A pair of front and rear mounting rails that attach to the rack posts—provided with the rack mount kit

• A pair of side mounting brackets and 16 flat head M4 x 6mm Phillips screws. These brackets attach
to the device if not pre-installed—provided with the rack mount kit

To mount the device on four posts in a threaded hole rack by using the JNP-4PST-RMK-1U-E rack
mount kit:

1. Wrap and fasten the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the other end of the strap
to the ESD point on the device.
2. Assemble the mounting rails.

a. Remove the guide blocks from the front mounting rails by loosening the screws and preserve
them for later use. See Figure 87 on page 141.
141

Figure 87: Remove Guide Blocks from Front Mounting Rail

b. Remove the guide blocks from the rear floating rails by loosening the screws and washers.
Preserve the guide blocks, screws, and washers for later use. See Figure 88 on page 141

Figure 88: Remove Guide Blocks from Rear Floating Rail

c. Slide the rear floating rails into the front mounting rails. See Figure 89 on page 141.

Figure 89: Slide Rear Floating Rail into Front Mounting Rail
142

d. Mounting rails assembled. See Figure 90 on page 142.

Figure 90: Front and Rear Rails Assembled

3. Attach the mounting rails to the threaded hole rack.

a. Align the guide blocks of the rear mounting rails with the rear-post holes. Pull the rear mounting
rails toward the front of the rack to lock the rails in place. You will hear a click sound when the
latch locks into the corresponding rack holes. See Figure 91 on page 142.

Figure 91: Install the Rear Floating Rails

b. Move the latch locks on the front mounting rails to open position, slide the front mounting rails
and align them to the front rack post. Push the lock latch to locked position and using the screws
removed in step 2.a and the washers removed in step 2.b, secure the front mounting rails to the
front rack post. See Figure 92 on page 143.
143

Figure 92: Install the Front Mounting Rails

c. Secure the rear floating rails to the rear rack post by using screws (not provided) appropriate for
your rack threaded size. See Figure 93 on page 143.

Figure 93: Secure the Rear Floating Rails

d. Visually ensure that the front and rear latches are locked into place on the mounting rails. See
Figure 94 on page 144.
144

Figure 94: Mounting Rails Installed and Secured

4. Attach mounting brackets to the device if not pre-installed. If your device already has the mounting
brackets pre-installed than skip this step and move to the next step.

a. Align the holes on the mounting bracket with the screw holes on the side panel of the chassis.

b. Insert the flat head M4 x 6mm Phillips screws to attach the mounting bracket into the aligned
holes on the chassis (see Figure 95 on page 144). Tighten the screws.

Figure 95: Attach the Mounting Brackets to the Device

5. Position the device in such a manner that the AIR OUT labels on components are next to the hot
aisle.
6. Grasp both sides of the device, lift it, and position the device such that the mounting rails slide into
the channels of the mounting brackets. See Figure 96 on page 145.
145

Figure 96: Slide the Device into the Rack

7. Tighten the two thumbscrews to secure the device. See Figure 97 on page 145.

Figure 97: Tighten Thumb Screws


146

Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch Flush


with the Front Posts of a Rack or Cabinet

NOTE: The protective earthing terminal on QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM


switches mounted flush with the front posts of a rack is accessible through the slot on the left
rear bracket only if the distance between the front posts and the rear posts is 23 in. (58.5 cm)
through 30.25 in. (76.8 cm).

Before you mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switch:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in "Site Preparation Checklist for QFX5120
Switches" on page 95.

• Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance,
and secure the rack to the building structure.

• Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings, with particular attention to Chassis and Component
Lifting Guidelines.

• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage (see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

• Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see "Unpack the QFX5120 Switch" on page 124).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

• Eight screws to secure the mounting brackets to the rack—not provided

• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap—not provided

• Front mounting bracket assembly for mounting the switch flush with the front posts of a rack—2
(provided with the four-post rack mount kit)

(The front mounting bracket assembly is made up of a side rail to which an L-shaped bracket is
attached.)

• Flat head 4x6-mm Phillips screws for attaching the front mounting brackets to the chassis—12
(provided with the four-post rack mount kit)

• Rear mounting brackets—2 (provided with the four-post rack mount kit)

You can mount a QFX5120 switch on four posts of a four-post 19-in. rack or in a cabinet that contains a
four-post 19-in. rack, flush with the front posts, by using a four-post rack mount kit. (The remainder of
147

this topic uses rack to mean rack or cabinet.) You can mount QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and
QFX5120-48YM switches in a recessed position inside a four-post rack by using the recessed mounting
brackets. You can also mount QFX5120-48YM switches on a two-post rack by using a separately
orderable two-post rack mount kit.

This topic describes the procedure to mount QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM
switches flush with the front posts of a four-post rack. If you want to mount the switch in a recessed
position from the front posts of a four-post rack, see "Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or
QFX5120-48YM Switch in a Recessed Position from the Front Posts of a Rack or Cabinet" on page 151.
If you want to mount a QFX5120-48YM switch on a two-post rack, see "Mount a QFX5120-48YM
Switch on a Two-Post Rack" on page 162.

NOTE: One person must be available to lift the switch while another person secures the switch
to the rack.

CAUTION: If you are mounting multiple units on a rack, mount the heaviest unit at the
bottom of the rack, and then mount the other units from the bottom of the rack to the
top in decreasing order of the weight of the units.

To mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switch flush with the front posts of a
four-post rack:

1. Place the switch on a flat, stable surface.


2. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to a site ESD point.
3. Align the front mounting bracket assembly (provided with the four-post rack mount kit) along the
side panel of the switch such that the front of the bracket is flush with the front panel of the switch
chassis.
4. Insert the flat head 4x6-mm Phillips screws for attaching the front mounting brackets (provided
with the four-post rack mount kit) into the aligned holes on the chassis (see Figure 98 on page 148,
Figure 99 on page 148, and Figure 100 on page 148). Tighten the screws.
148

Figure 98: Attach the Flush Mounting Brackets to a QFX5120-48T Switch Chassis

Figure 99: Attach the Flush Mounting Brackets to a QFX5120-48Y Switch Chassis

Figure 100: Attach the Flush Mounting Brackets to a QFX5120-48YM Switch Chassis

5. Decide which end of the switch you want to place at the front of the rack. Position the switch so
that the AIR IN labels on the fan modules are facing the cold aisle, or the AIR OUT labels on the fan
modules are facing the hot aisle.
6. Have one person grasp both sides of the switch, lift the switch, and position it in the rack, aligning
the holes of the mounting brackets with the threaded holes in the front post of the rack. Align the
bottom hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole in each rack rail, making sure that the
chassis is level.
7. Have a second person secure the front of the switch to the rack by using the screws appropriate for
your rack. Tighten the screws (see Figure 101 on page 149, Figure 102 on page 149, and Figure
103 on page 149).
149

Figure 101: Secure the QFX5120-48T Switch to the Front Posts of a Rack

Figure 102: Secure the QFX5120-48Y Switch to the Front Posts of a Rack

Figure 103: Secure the QFX5120-48YM Switch to the Front Posts of a Rack

8. Slide the rear mounting bracket blades into the side rails of the front mounting brackets attached to
the switch chassis (see Figure 104 on page 150, Figure 105 on page 150, and Figure 106 on page
151).
9. Ensure that the chassis is level. Align the holes of the rear mounting brackets with the threaded
holes in the rear post of the rack. Align the bottom hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole
150

in each rack rail. Align the bottom hole in both the rear mounting brackets with the bottom hole in
the front mounting brackets.
10. Secure the rear mounting brackets to the rear post of the rack by using screws appropriate for your
rack (see Figure 104 on page 150, Figure 105 on page 150, and Figure 106 on page 151).

Figure 104: Secure the QFX5120-48T Switch to the Rear Post of the Rack by Using the Rear
Mounting Brackets

Figure 105: Secure the QFX5120-48Y Switch to the Rear Post of the Rack by Using the Rear
Mounting Brackets
151

Figure 106: Secure the QFX5120-48YM Switch to the Rear Post of the Rack by Using the Rear
Mounting Brackets

Your switch is now installed on a four-post rack.

Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch in a


Recessed Position from the Front Posts of a Rack or Cabinet

NOTE: The protective earthing terminal on QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM


switches mounted in a recessed position from the front posts of a rack is accessible through the
slot on the left rear bracket only if the distance between the front posts and the rear posts is
25 in. (63.5 cm) through 32.25 in. (81.9 cm).

Before you mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switch:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in "Site Preparation Checklist for QFX5120
Switches" on page 95.

• Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance,
and secure the rack to the building structure.

• Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings, with particular attention to Chassis and Component
Lifting Guidelines.

• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage (see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

• Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see "Unpack the QFX5120 Switch" on page 124).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided


152

• Eight screws to secure the mounting brackets to the rack—not provided

• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap—not provided

• Front mounting bracket assembly for mounting the switch flush with the front posts of a rack—2
(provided with the four-post rack mount kit)

(The front mounting bracket assembly is made up of a side rail to which an L-shaped bracket is
attached.)

• Flat head 4x6-mm Phillips screws for attaching the front mounting brackets to the chassis—12
(provided with the four-post rack mount kit)

• Rear mounting brackets—2 (provided with the four-post rack mount kit)

• Recessed mounting brackets for mounting the switch in a recessed position from the front posts of a
rack—2 (provided with the four-post rack mount kit)

• Flat head 4-40 Phillips screws for attaching the recessed mounting brackets to the side rails—6
(provided with the four-post rack mount kit)

You can mount a QFX5120 switch on four posts of a four-post 19-in. rack or in a cabinet that contains a
four-post 19-in. rack, flush with the front posts, by using a four-post rack mount kit. (The remainder of
this topic uses rack to mean rack or cabinet.) You can mount QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and
QFX5120-48YM switches in a recessed position inside a four-post rack by using the recessed mounting
brackets. You can also mount QFX5120-48YM switches on a two-post rack by using a separately
orderable two-post rack mount kit.

This topic describes the procedure to mount QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM
switches in a recessed position from the front posts of a four-post rack. If you want to mount the switch
flush with the front posts of a four-post rack, see "Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or
QFX5120-48YM Switch Flush with the Front Posts of a Rack or Cabinet" on page 146. If you want to
mount a QFX5120-48YM switch on a two-post rack, see "Mount a QFX5120-48YM Switch on a Two-
Post Rack" on page 162.

NOTE: One person must be available to lift the switch while another person secures the switch
to the rack.

CAUTION: If you are mounting multiple units on a rack, mount the heaviest unit at the
bottom of the rack, and then mount the other units from the bottom of the rack to the
top in decreasing order of the weight of the units.
153

To mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switch in a recessed position from the


front posts of a four-post rack:

1. Place the switch on a flat, stable surface.


2. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to a site ESD point.
3. Unscrew and detach the L-shaped bracket from the side rail in the front mounting bracket assembly
provided with the four-post rack mount kit (see Figure 107 on page 153).

Figure 107: Unscrew and Detach the L-Shaped Bracket from the Side Rail

1— Side rail 2— L-shaped bracket

4. Attach the recessed mounting brackets provided with the four-post rack mount kit to the side rails
by using the flat head 4-40 Phillips screws provided with the four-post rack mount kit (see Figure
108 on page 153).

Figure 108: Attach the Recessed Mounting Bracket to the Side Rail

1— Side rail 2— Recessed mounting bracket

5. Align the recessed mounting bracket assembly along the side panel of the switch.
6. Insert the flat head 4x6-mm Phillips screws for attaching the recess mounting bracket assembly
(provided with the four-post rack mount kit) into the aligned holes on the chassis (see Figure 109
on page 154, Figure 110 on page 154, and Figure 111 on page 154). Tighten the screws.
154

Figure 109: Attach the Recessed Mounting Bracket Assembly to the QFX5120-48T Switch Chassis

Figure 110: Attach the Recessed Mounting Bracket Assembly to the QFX5120-48Y Switch Chassis

Figure 111: Attach the Recessed Mounting Bracket Assembly to the QFX5120-48YM Switch
Chassis

7. Decide which end of the switch you want to place at the front of the rack. Position the switch so
that the AIR IN labels on the fan modules are facing the cold aisle, or the AIR OUT labels on the fan
modules are facing the hot aisle.
8. Have one person grasp both sides of the switch, lift the switch, and position it in the rack, aligning
the holes of the mounting brackets with the threaded holes in the front post of the rack. Align the
bottom hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole in each rack rail, making sure that the
chassis is level.
9. Have a second person secure the front of the switch to the rack by using the screws appropriate for
your rack. Tighten the screws (see Figure 112 on page 155, Figure 113 on page 155, and Figure
114 on page 155).
155

Figure 112: Secure the QFX5120-48T Switch to the Front Posts of a Rack

Figure 113: Secure the QFX5120-48Y Switch to the Front Posts of a Rack

Figure 114: Secure the QFX5120-48YM Switch to the Front Posts of a Rack

10. Slide the rear mounting bracket blades into the side rails of the recess mounting bracket assembly
attached to the switch chassis (see Figure 115 on page 156, Figure 116 on page 156, and Figure
117 on page 157).
11. Ensure that the chassis is level. Align the holes of the rear mounting brackets with the threaded
holes in the rear post of the rack. Align the bottom hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole
156

in each rack rail. Align the bottom hole in both the rear mounting brackets with the bottom hole in
the front mounting brackets.
12. Secure the rear mounting brackets to the rear post of the rack by using screws appropriate for your
rack (see Figure 115 on page 156, Figure 116 on page 156, and Figure 117 on page 157).

Figure 115: Secure the QFX5120-48T Switch to the Rear Post of the Rack by Using the Rear
Mounting Brackets

Figure 116: Secure the QFX5120-48Y Switch to the Rear Post of the Rack by Using the Rear
Mounting Brackets
157

Figure 117: Secure the QFX5120-48YM Switch to the Rear Post of the Rack by Using the Rear
Mounting Brackets

Your switch is now installed on a four-post rack.

Mount a QFX5120-48Y Switch on a Two-Post Rack

IN THIS SECTION

Mount a QF5120-T Switch on a Two-Post Rack | 159

Mount a QFX5120-48YM Switch on a Two-Post Rack | 162

Before you mount a QFX5120-48Y switch on a two-post rack:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in "Site Preparation Checklist for QFX5120
Switches" on page 95.

• Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance,
and secure the rack to the building structure.

• Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings, with particular attention to Chassis and Component
Lifting Guidelines.

• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage (see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

• Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see "Unpack the QFX5120 Switch" on page 124).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
158

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

• Eight screws to secure the mounting brackets to the rack—not provided

• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap—not provided

• Two-post rack mounting bracket for mounting the switch on a two-post rack—2 (provided with the
two-post rack mount kit)

• Flat head 4x6-mm Phillips screws for attaching the two-post rack mounting brackets to the chassis—
8 (provided with the two-post rack mount kit)

You can mount a QFX5120 switch on four posts of a four-post 19-in. rack or in a cabinet that contains a
four-post 19-in. rack, flush with the front posts, by using a four-post rack mount kit. (The remainder of
this topic uses rack to mean rack or cabinet.) You can mount QFX5120-48Y switches in a recessed
position inside a four-post rack by using the recessed mounting brackets. You can also mount
QFX5120-48Y switches on a two-post rack by using a separately orderable two-post rack mount kit.

This topic describes the procedure to mount a QFX5120-48Y switch on a two-post rack. If you want to
mount the switch flush with the front posts of a four-post rack, see "Mount a QFX5120-48T,
QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch Flush with the Front Posts of a Rack or Cabinet" on page
146. If you want to mount the switch in a recessed position from the front posts of a four-post rack, see
"Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch in a Recessed Position from the
Front Posts of a Rack or Cabinet" on page 151.

NOTE: One person must be available to lift the switch while another person secures the switch
to the rack.

CAUTION: If you are mounting multiple units on a rack, mount the heaviest unit at the
bottom of the rack, and then mount the other units from the bottom of the rack to the
top in decreasing order of the weight of the units.

To mount a QFX5120-48Y switch on a two-post rack:

1. Place the switch on a flat, stable surface.


2. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to a site ESD point.
3. Align the two-post rack mounting bracket (provided with the two-post rack mount kit) along the side
panel of the switch.
4. Insert the flat head 4x6-mm Phillips screws for attaching the two-post rack mounting brackets
(provided with the two-post rack mount kit) into the aligned holes on the chassis. Tighten the screws.
159

Figure 118: Attach the Two-Post Rack Mounting Brackets to a QFX5120-48Y Switch Chassis

5. Decide which end of the switch you want to place at the front of the rack. Position the switch so that
the AIR IN labels on the fan modules are facing the cold aisle, or the AIR OUT labels on the fan
modules are facing the hot aisle.
6. Have one person grasp both sides of the switch, lift the switch, and position it in the rack, aligning
the holes of the mounting brackets with the threaded holes in the posts of the rack. Align the bottom
hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole in each rack rail, making sure that the chassis is level.
7. Have a second person secure the switch to the rack by using the screws appropriate for your rack.
Tighten the screws.

Figure 119: Secure the QFX5120-48Y Switch to the Two-Post Rack

Your switch is now installed on a two-post rack.

Mount a QF5120-T Switch on a Two-Post Rack


Before you mount a QFX5120-48T switch on a two-post rack:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in "Site Preparation Checklist for QFX5120
Switches" on page 95.
160

• Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance,
and secure the rack to the building structure.

• Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings, with particular attention to Chassis and Component
Lifting Guidelines.

• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage (see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

• Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see "Unpack the QFX5120 Switch" on page 124).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

• Eight screws to secure the mounting brackets to the rack—not provided

• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap—not provided

• Two-post rack mounting bracket for mounting the switch on a two-post rack—2 (provided with the
two-post rack mount kit)

• Flat head 4x6-mm Phillips screws for attaching the two-post rack mounting brackets to the chassis—
8 (provided with the two-post rack mount kit)

You can mount a QFX5120 switch on four posts of a four-post 19-in. rack or in a cabinet that contains a
four-post 19-in. rack, flush with the front posts, by using a four-post rack mount kit. (The remainder of
this topic uses rack to mean rack or cabinet.) You can mount QFX5120-48T switches in a recessed
position inside a four-post rack by using the recessed mounting brackets. You can also mount
QFX5120-48T switches on a two-post rack by using a separately orderable two-post rack mount kit.

This topic describes the procedure to mount a QFX5120-48T switch on a two-post rack. If you want to
mount the switch flush with the front posts of a four-post rack, see "Mount a QFX5120-48T,
QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch Flush with the Front Posts of a Rack or Cabinet" on page
146. If you want to mount the switch in a recessed position from the front posts of a four-post rack, see
"Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch in a Recessed Position from the
Front Posts of a Rack or Cabinet" on page 151.

NOTE: One person must be available to lift the switch while another person secures the switch
to the rack.
161

CAUTION: If you are mounting multiple units on a rack, mount the heaviest unit at the
bottom of the rack, and then mount the other units from the bottom of the rack to the
top in decreasing order of the weight of the units.

To mount a QFX5120-48T switch on a two-post rack:

1. Place the switch on a flat, stable surface.


2. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to a site ESD point.
3. Align the two-post rack mounting bracket (provided with the two-post rack mount kit) along the side
panel of the switch).
4. Insert the flat head 4x6-mm Phillips screws for attaching the two-post rack mounting brackets
(provided with the two-post rack mount kit) into the aligned holes on the chassis. Tighten the screws.

Figure 120: Attach the Two-Post Rack Mounting Brackets to a QFX5120-48T Switch Chassis

5. Decide which end of the switch you want to place at the front of the rack. Position the switch so that
the AIR IN labels on the fan modules are facing the cold aisle, or the AIR OUT labels on the fan
modules are facing the hot aisle.
6. Have one person grasp both sides of the switch, lift the switch, and position it in the rack, aligning
the holes of the mounting brackets with the threaded holes in the posts of the rack. Align the bottom
hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole in each rack rail, making sure that the chassis is level.
7. Have a second person secure the switch to the rack by using the screws appropriate for your rack.
Tighten the screws).
162

Figure 121: Secure the QFX5120-48T Switch to the Two-Post Rack

Your switch is now installed on a two-post rack.

Mount a QFX5120-48YM Switch on a Two-Post Rack


Before you mount a QFX5120-48YM switch on a two-post rack:

• Verify that the site meets the requirements described in "Site Preparation Checklist for QFX5120
Switches" on page 95.

• Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance,
and secure the rack to the building structure.

• Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings, with particular attention to Chassis and Component
Lifting Guidelines.

• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage (see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

• Remove the switch from the shipping carton (see "Unpack the QFX5120 Switch" on page 124).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

• Eight screws to secure the mounting brackets to the rack—not provided

• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap—not provided

• Two-post rack mounting bracket for mounting the switch on a two-post rack—2 (provided with the
two-post rack mount kit)

• Flat head 4x6-mm Phillips screws for attaching the two-post rack mounting brackets to the chassis—
8 (provided with the two-post rack mount kit)
163

You can mount a QFX5120 switch on four posts of a four-post 19-in. rack or in a cabinet that contains a
four-post 19-in. rack, flush with the front posts, by using a four-post rack mount kit. (The remainder of
this topic uses rack to mean rack or cabinet.) You can mount QFX5120-48YM switches in a recessed
position inside a four-post rack by using the recessed mounting brackets. You can also mount
QFX5120-48YM switches on a two-post rack by using a separately orderable two-post rack mount kit.

This topic describes the procedure to mount a QFX5120-48YM switch on a two-post rack. If you want
to mount the switch flush with the front posts of a four-post rack, see "Mount a QFX5120-48T,
QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch Flush with the Front Posts of a Rack or Cabinet" on page
146. If you want to mount the switch in a recessed position from the front posts of a four-post rack, see
"Mount a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM Switch in a Recessed Position from the
Front Posts of a Rack or Cabinet" on page 151.

NOTE: One person must be available to lift the switch while another person secures the switch
to the rack.

CAUTION: If you are mounting multiple units on a rack, mount the heaviest unit at the
bottom of the rack, and then mount the other units from the bottom of the rack to the
top in decreasing order of the weight of the units.

To mount a QFX5120-48YM switch on a two-post rack:

1. Place the switch on a flat, stable surface.


2. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to a site ESD point.
3. Align the two-post rack mounting bracket (provided with the two-post rack mount kit) along the side
panel of the switch.
4. Insert the flat head 4x6-mm Phillips screws for attaching the two-post rack mounting brackets
(provided with the two-post rack mount kit) into the aligned holes on the chassis). Tighten the
screws.
164

Figure 122: Attach the Two-Post Rack Mounting Brackets to a QFX5120-48YM Switch Chassis

5. Decide which end of the switch you want to place at the front of the rack. Position the switch so that
the AIR IN labels on the fan modules are facing the cold aisle, or the AIR OUT labels on the fan
modules are facing the hot aisle.
6. Have one person grasp both sides of the switch, lift the switch, and position it in the rack, aligning
the holes of the mounting brackets with the threaded holes in the posts of the rack. Align the bottom
hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole in each rack rail, making sure that the chassis is level.
7. Have a second person secure the switch to the rack by using the screws appropriate for your rack.
Tighten the screws.

Figure 123: Secure the QFX5120-48YM Switch to the Two-Post Rack

Your switch is now installed on a two-post rack.

Connect the QFX5120 to Power

IN THIS SECTION

Connect the QFX5120 Switch to Earth Ground | 165


165

Connect Power to an AC-Powered QFX5120 Switch | 170

Connect Power to a DC-Powered QFX5120 Switch | 173

Connect Power to a QFX5120-48T Switch Powered by a High-Voltage Power Supply | 179

Connect the QFX5120 Switch to Earth Ground

Before you connect earth ground to a QFX5120 switch, ensure that you have the following parts and
tools available:

• Grounding cable:

• QFX5120-32C: 12 AWG (3.31 mm²), minimum 90° C wire, or as permitted by the local code—not
provided

• QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM: 14 AWG (2.08 mm²), minimum 90° C wire,
or as permitted by the local code—not provided

• Grounding lug:

• QFX5120-32C: 4.3-mm circular lug—not provided

• QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM: Panduit LCD10-10A-L or equivalent—not


provided

• Screws to secure the grounding lug:

• QFX5120-32C: 8-mm screw—not provided

• QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM: Two 10-32 x .25-in. screws with #10 split-
lock washers—not provided

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

• ESD grounding strap—not provided

To ensure proper operation and to meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements,
you must connect the switch to earth ground before you connect power to the switch. You must install
the switch in a restricted-access location and ensure that the chassis is properly grounded at all times.

QFX5120-32C switches have two 1-hole protective earthing terminals on the rear panel. The required
method to ground the QFX5120-32C chassis is to use one of the protective earthing terminals on the
switch chassis. Under all circumstances, use this grounding connection to ground the chassis. For AC-
powered systems, you must also use the grounding wire in the AC power cord along with the two-hole
166

grounding lug connection. This tested system meets or exceeds all applicable EMC regulatory
requirements with the two-hole protective grounding terminal.

QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48Y switches have one 2-hole protective earthing terminal on the left
panel. The required method to ground the QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48Y chassis is to use the
protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis. Under all circumstances, use this grounding
connection to ground the chassis. For AC-powered systems, you must also use the grounding wire in the
AC power cord along with the two-hole grounding lug connection. This tested system meets or exceeds
all applicable EMC regulatory requirements with the two-hole protective grounding terminal.

QFX5120-48YM switches have two 2-hole protective earthing terminals on the left panel. Under all
circumstances, use this grounding connection to ground the chassis. For AC-powered systems, you must
also use the grounding wire in the AC power cord along with the two-hole grounding lug connection.
This tested system meets or exceeds all applicable EMC regulatory requirements with the two-hole
protective grounding terminal.

CAUTION: Ensure that a licensed electrician has attached the appropriate grounding lug
to the grounding cable that you supply. Using a grounding cable with an incorrectly
attached lug can damage the switch.

NOTE: The protective earthing terminal on QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM


switches mounted flush with the front posts of a rack is accessible through the slot on the left
rear bracket only if the distance between the front posts and the rear posts is 23 in. (58.5 cm)
through 30.25 in. (76.8 cm). The protective earthing terminal on QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y,
and QFX5120-48YM switches mounted in a recessed position from the front posts of a rack is
accessible through the slot on the left rear bracket only if the distance between the front posts
and the rear posts is 25 in. (63.5 cm) through 32.25 in. (81.9 cm). AC-powered switches gain
additional grounding when you plug the power supply in the switch into a grounded AC power
outlet by using the AC power cord appropriate for your geographical location. For DC-powered
QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switches, if you are unable to access the
protective earthing terminal, you can connect the grounding cable to the earth ground terminal
on the DC power supply.

To ground the QFX5120:

1. Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground, such as the rack in which the
switch is mounted.
2. Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing terminal:

• On the rear panel of a QFX5120-32C switch (see Figure 124 on page 167).

• On the left panel on QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48Y switches (see Figure 125 on page 167).
167

• On the left panel on a QFX5120-48YM switch (see Figure 126 on page 168, Figure 127 on page
168, Figure 128 on page 169, or Figure 129 on page 169).

Figure 124: Connect a Grounding Cable to the QFX5120-32C

Figure 125: Connect a Grounding Cable to the QFX5120-48T or QFX5120-48Y


168

Figure 126: Connect a Grounding Cable to the Protective Earthing Terminal in the Rear of the Left
Panel on the QFX5120-48YM Mounted on Four Posts

Figure 127: Connect a Grounding Cable to the Protective Earthing Terminal in the Front of the Left
Panel on the QFX5120-48YM Mounted on Four Posts
169

Figure 128: Connect a Grounding Cable to the Protective Earthing Terminal in the Rear of the Left
Panel on the QFX5120-48YM Mounted on Two Posts

Figure 129: Connect a Grounding Cable to the Protective Earthing Terminal in the Front of the Left
Panel on the QFX5120-48YM Mounted on Two Posts

3. Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with the screws.
4. Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other switch
components.
170

WARNING: Ensure that the cable does not drape where people could trip over it.

Connect Power to an AC-Powered QFX5120 Switch

Before you connect AC power to the switch:

• Ensure that you have a power cord appropriate for your geographical location available.

• Ensure that you have the power cord retainer shipped with the switch.

• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage (see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

• Ensure that you have connected the switch chassis to earth ground.

CAUTION: Before you connect power to the switch, a licensed electrician must attach
a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with an
incorrectly attached lug can damage the switch (for example, by causing a short
circuit).
To meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and to ensure
proper operation, you must connect the chassis to earth ground before you connect it
to power (see "Connect the QFX5120 Switch to Earth Ground" on page 165). For
installations that require a separate grounding conductor to the chassis, use the
protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis to connect to earth ground. The
switch gains additional grounding when you plug the power supply in the switch into a
grounded AC power outlet by using the AC power cord appropriate for your
geographical location.

We ship the QFX5120 switches with two power supplies preinstalled. Each power supply is a hot-
removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable unit (FRU) when the second power supply is installed and
running: You can remove and replace them without powering off the switch or disrupting switch
functions.

To connect power to an AC-powered QFX5120 switch:

1. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to a site ESD point.
2. Ensure that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis.
171

3. Locate the power cord or cords shipped with the switch; the cords have plugs appropriate for your
geographical location.

WARNING: Ensure that the power cord does not block access to device components
or drape where people can trip on it.

4. Connect the power cord.

• For QFX5120-32C, QFX5120-48T, and QFX5120-48Y switches:

a. Push the end of the retainer strip into the hole next to the inlet on the power supply faceplate
until it snaps into place. Ensure that the loop in the retainer strip faces the power cord.

b. Press the small tab on the retainer strip to loosen the loop. Slide the loop until you have
enough space to insert the power cord coupler into the inlet.

c. Insert the power cord coupler firmly into the inlet.

d. Slide the loop toward the power supply until it is snug against the base of the coupler.

e. Press the tab on the loop and draw out the loop into a tight circle (see Figure 130 on page 171
and Figure 131 on page 172).

Figure 130: Connect Power Cord to an AC-Powered QFX5120-32C Switch


172

Figure 131: Connect Power Cord to an AC-Powered QFX5120-48T or QFX5120-48Y Switch

• For QFX5120-48YM switches:

a. Gently lift the retainer clip up.

b. Insert the power cord coupler firmly into the inlet.

c. Push the retainer clip down until it is snug against the base of the coupler (see Figure 132 on
page 172).

Figure 132: Connect Power to an AC-Powered QFX5120-48YM Switch

5. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the off position.

NOTE: The QFX5120 switch powers on as soon as power is provided to the power supply.
There is no power switch on the QFX5120.

6. Insert the power cord plug into an AC power source outlet.


7. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the on position.
8. • If you are connecting the power supply in a QFX5120-32C switch, verify that the LED on the

power supply is lit green. If the LED is lit or blinking red, disconnect the power supply from the
power source, and replace the power supply (see "Maintain the QFX5120 Power System" on page
204).
173

• If you are connecting the power supply in a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM


switch, verify that the AC and DC LEDs on the power supply are lit green. If the fault LED (!) is lit,
disconnect the power supply from the power source, and replace the power supply (see "Maintain
the QFX5120 Power System" on page 204).

CAUTION: Do not remove the power supply until you have a replacement power
supply ready: you must install the replacement power supply within one minute after
removing the failed power supply to ensure proper airflow and prevent chassis
overheating.

Connect Power to a DC-Powered QFX5120 Switch

Before you connect DC power to the switch:

• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage (see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

• Ensure that you have connected the switch chassis to earth ground (see "Connect the QFX5120
Switch to Earth Ground" on page 165).

CAUTION: Before you connect power to the switch, a licensed electrician must attach
a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with an
incorrectly attached lug can damage the switch (for example, by causing a short
circuit).
To meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and to ensure
proper operation, you must connect the chassis to earth ground before you connect it
to power. For installations that require a separate grounding conductor to the chassis,
use the protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis to connect to the earth
ground.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• For the DC-powered models QFX5120-32C-DC-AFO and QFX5120-32C-DC-AFI: DC power cable


with a plug—provided

• For the DC-powered models QFX5120-48T-DC-AFO, QFX5120-48T-DC-AFI, QFX5120-48Y-DC-


AFO2, and QFX5120-48Y-DC-AFI2: DC power source cables (14–16 AWG) with ring lug
(Molex 190700069 or equivalent)—not provided
174

• For the DC-powered models QFX5120-48YM-DC-AO and QFX5120-48YM-DC-AI: DC power


source cables (14–12 AWG) with ring lug (Molex 190700069 or equivalent)—not provided

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

• Multimeter—not provided

We ship the QFX5120 switches with two power supplies preinstalled. Each power supply is a hot-
removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable unit (FRU) when the second power supply is installed and
running: You can install power supplies in the slots next to the fan modules without powering off the
switch or disrupting switch functions.

NOTE: The battery returns of the DC power supply must be connected as an isolated DC return
(DC-I).

To connect power to a DC-powered QFX5120-32C switch:

1. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to a site ESD point.
2. Ensure that the input circuit breaker is open so that the voltage across the DC power source cable
leads is 0 V and that the cable leads do not become active while you are connecting DC power.
3. Ensure that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis.
4. Connect each power supply to the power source by inserting the DC connector of the power cable
provided into the power supply (see Figure 133 on page 174).

Figure 133: Connect Power to a DC-Powered QFX5120-32C Switch

5. Connect each power cable to the power sources. Secure power source cables to the power supplies
by screwing the ring lugs attached to the cables to the appropriate terminals.

• Connect the ring lug of the green-yellow cable to earth ground.

• Connect the ring lug of the black cable to the negative (–) DC power source.
175

• Connect the ring lug of the red cable to the positive (+) DC power source.

We’ve designed the QFX5120-32C switch to operate with a DC power supply that has a single,
nonredundant feed input. For source redundancy, you must install two DC power supplies in the
QFX5120-32C; connect source (A) to one power supply and connect source (B) to the second power
supply. This configuration provides the commonly deployed A/B feed redundancy for the system.

CAUTION: The connection between each power source and power supply must
include a circuit breaker. Do not connect two sources to a single power supply because
doing so can potentially cause circulating current in feed wires whenever there is any
difference in the voltage of the two sources.

6. Close the input circuit breaker.

NOTE: The QFX5120 switch powers on as soon as power is provided to the power supply.
There is no power switch on the QFX5120.

7. Verify that the LED on the power supply is lit green. If the LED is lit or blinking red, disconnect the
power supply from the power source, and replace the power supply (see "Remove a Power Supply
from a QFX5120 Switch" on page 205).

CAUTION: Do not remove the power supply until you have a replacement power
supply ready: you must install the replacement power supply within one minute after
removing the failed power supply to ensure proper airflow and prevent chassis
overheating.

To connect power to a DC-powered QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switch:

1. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to a site ESD point.

2. Verify that the DC power cables are correctly labeled before making connections to the power
supply. In a typical power distribution scheme where the return is connected to chassis ground at
the battery plant, you can use a multimeter to verify the resistance of the –48V and RTN DC cables
to chassis ground:

• The cable with very low resistance (indicating a closed circuit) to chassis ground is positive (+)
and will be installed on the V+ (return) DC power input terminal.

• The cable with very high resistance (indicating an open circuit) to chassis ground is negative (–)
and will be installed on the V– (input) DC power input terminal.
176

CAUTION: You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity.
The power source cables might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity.
There is no standard coding for DC power cables. The coding used by the external
DC power source at your site determines the coding for the leads on the power
cables that attach to the DC power input terminals on each power supply.

3. Install heat-shrink tubing insulation around the power cables.

To install heat-shrink tubing:

a. Slide the tubing over the portion of the cable where it is attached to the lug barrel. Ensure that
tubing covers the end of the wire and the barrel of the lug attached to it.

b. Shrink the tubing with a heat gun. Ensure that you heat all sides of the tubing evenly so that it
shrinks around the cable tightly.

Figure 134 on page 176 shows the steps to install heat-shrink tubing.

NOTE: Do not overheat the tubing.

Figure 134: How to Install Heat-Shrink Tubing


177

4. Ensure that the input circuit breaker is open so that the voltage across the DC power source cable
leads is 0 V and that the cable leads do not become active while you are connecting DC power.

NOTE: The V+ terminals are referred to as +RTN, and the V– terminals are referred to as –
48 V in DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning and DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines.

5. Ensure that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis.

6. Remove the terminal block cover. The terminal block cover is a piece of clear plastic that snaps into
place over the terminal block.

7. Remove the screws on the terminals using the screwdriver. Save the screws.

WARNING: Ensure that the power cables do not block access to device
components or drape where people can trip on them.

8. Connect each power supply to the power sources. Secure power source cables to the power
supplies by screwing the ring lugs attached to the cables to the appropriate terminals by using the
screw from the terminals (see Figure 135 on page 178).

We’ve designed the QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches to operate with
a DC power supply that has a single, nonredundant, feed input. For source redundancy, you must
install two DC power supplies in the QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches;
and then connect source (A) to one power supply and connect source (B) to the second power
supply. This configuration provides the commonly deployed A/B feed redundancy for the system.

The terminal block of the power supply has four terminals labeled V+, V+, V–, and V– for
connecting DC power source cables labeled positive (+) and negative (–). The V+ terminals are
shunted internally together, as are the V– terminals.

CAUTION: The connection between each power source and power supply must
include a circuit breaker.
Do not connect two sources to a single power supply because doing so can
potentially cause circulating current in feed wires whenever there is any difference
in the voltage of the two sources.

a. Secure the ring lug of the positive (+) DC power source cable to the V+ terminal on the DC
power supply.
178

b. Secure the ring lug of the negative (–) DC power source cable to the V– terminal on the DC
power supply.

c. Tighten the screws on the power supply terminals until snug using the screwdriver. Do not
overtighten; apply between 5 lb-in. (0.56 Nm) and 6 lb-in. (0.68 Nm) of torque on the screws.

CAUTION: The V+ terminals are shunted internally together, as are the V-


terminals. The same polarity terminal can be wired together from the same source
to provide an additional current path in a higher power chassis. Do not connect the
terminals to different sources.

Figure 135: Secure Ring Lugs to the Terminals on the QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or
QFX5120-48YM DC Power Supply

9. Replace the terminal block cover.

10. Close the input circuit breaker.

NOTE: The QFX5120 switch powers on as soon as power is provided to the power supply.
There is no power switch on the QFX5120.

11. Verify that the IN and OUT LEDs on the power supply are lit green. If the fault LED (!) is lit,
disconnect the power supply from the power source, and replace the power supply (see "Remove a
Power Supply from a QFX5120 Switch" on page 205).
179

CAUTION: Do not remove the power supply until you have a replacement power
supply ready: you must install the replacement power supply within one minute
after removing the failed power supply to ensure proper airflow and prevent chassis
overheating.

Connect Power to a QFX5120-48T Switch Powered by a High-Voltage


Power Supply

Before you connect power to a QFX5120-48T switch powered by a high-voltage power supply:

• Ensure that you have a power cord appropriate for your geographical location and power input
available. You must order the power cord separately.

• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage (see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

• Ensure that you have connected the switch chassis to earth ground.

CAUTION: Before you connect power to the switch, a licensed electrician must attach
a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with an
incorrectly attached lug can damage the switch (for example, by causing a short
circuit).
To meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and to ensure
proper operation, you must connect the chassis to earth ground before you connect it
to power (see "Connect the QFX5120 Switch to Earth Ground" on page 165). For
installations that require a separate grounding conductor to the chassis, use the
protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis to connect to earth ground. The
switch gains additional grounding when you plug the power supply in the switch into a
grounded AC power outlet by using the AC power cord appropriate for your
geographical location.

We ship the QFX5120 switches with two 650-W AC or DC power supplies preinstalled. You must order
a high-voltage power supply separately. Each power supply is a hot-removable and hot-insertable field-
replaceable unit (FRU) when the second power supply is installed and running: You can remove and
replace them without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions.

To connect power to a QFX5120-48T switch powered by a high-voltage power supply:


180

1. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to a site ESD point.
2. Ensure that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis.
3. Locate the power cord appropriate for your geographical location and power input.

WARNING: Ensure that the power cord does not block access to device components
or drape where people can trip on it.

4. Insert the coupler end of the power cord into the power cord inlet on the power supply faceplate
(see Figure 136 on page 180).

Figure 136: Connect Power to a QFX5120-48T Switch Powered by a High-Voltage Power Supply

NOTE: The QFX5120 switch powers on as soon as power is provided to the power supply.
There is no power switch on the QFX5120.

5. Connect power to the switch:


• AC power input:

a. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the off position.

b. Insert the power cord plug into an AC power source outlet.

c. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the on position.

DC power input:

a. Switch the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit to the off position.

b. Connect the power cables to the terminals on the power source.

c. Close the input circuit breaker.


181

6. Verify that the AC and DC LEDs on the power supply are lit green. If the fault LED (!) is lit, disconnect
the power supply from the power source, and replace the power supply (see "Remove a Power
Supply from a QFX5120 Switch" on page 205).

Connect the QFX5120 to the Network

IN THIS SECTION

Install a Transceiver | 181

Install a QSFP28 Transceiver | 184

Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable | 187

Install a Transceiver

Before you install a transceiver in a device, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for
safe handling of lasers (see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings).

Ensure that you have a rubber safety cap available to cover the transceiver.

The transceivers for Juniper Networks devices are hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable
units (FRUs). You can remove and replace the transceivers without powering off the device or disrupting
the device functions.

NOTE: After you insert a transceiver or after you change the media-type configuration, wait for
6 seconds for the interface to display operational commands.

NOTE: We recommend that you use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased
from Juniper Networks with your Juniper Networks device.
182

CAUTION: The Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) provides


complete support for Juniper-supplied optical modules and cables. However, JTAC does
not provide support for third-party optical modules and cables that are not qualified or
supplied by Juniper Networks. If you face a problem running a Juniper device that uses
third-party optical modules or cables, JTAC may help you diagnose host-related issues if
the observed issue is not, in the opinion of JTAC, related to the use of the third-party
optical modules or cables. Your JTAC engineer will likely request that you check the
third-party optical module or cable and, if required, replace it with an equivalent
Juniper-qualified component.
Use of third-party optical modules with high-power consumption (for example,
coherent ZR or ZR+) can potentially cause thermal damage to or reduce the lifespan of
the host equipment. Any damage to the host equipment due to the use of third-party
optical modules or cables is the users’ responsibility. Juniper Networks will accept no
liability for any damage caused due to such use.

Figure 137 on page 184 shows how to install a QSFP+ transceiver. The procedure is the same for all
types of transceivers except the QSFP28 and CFP transceivers.

To install a transceiver:

CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to the transceiver, do not


touch the connector pins at the end of the transceiver.

1. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to the ESD point on the switch.
2. Remove the transceiver from its bag.
3. Check to see whether the transceiver is covered with a rubber safety cap. If it is not, cover the
transceiver with a rubber safety cap.

LASER WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when


inserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and protects
your eyes from accidental exposure to laser light.

4. If the port in which you want to install the transceiver is covered with a dust cover, remove the dust
cover and save it in case you need to cover the port later. If you are hot-swapping a transceiver, wait
for at least 10 seconds after removing the transceiver from the port before installing a new
transceiver.
5. Using both hands, carefully place the transceiver in the empty port. The connectors must face the
chassis.
183

CAUTION: Before you slide the transceiver into the port, ensure that the transceiver is
aligned correctly. Misalignment might cause the pins to bend, making the transceiver
unusable.

6. Slide the transceiver in gently until it is fully seated. If you are installing a CFP transceiver, use your
fingers to tighten the captive screws on the transceiver.
7. Remove the rubber safety cap from the transceiver and the end of the cable, and insert the cable into
the transceiver.

LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends
of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cable connected to a
transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or


removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and protects your eyes from
accidental exposure to laser light.

8. If there is a cable management system, arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent
the cable from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it does not support its
own weight as it hangs toward the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in
the cable management system. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do not allow
fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.

NOTE: When you install SFP-DD transceivers, push it hard until you hear a click sound. Use a
long nose plier to pull the SFP-DD transceiver connected on the top and bottom rows of the
chassis where the pull tabs face each other.
184

NOTE: Make sure to use a dust cap to cover ports that are unused.

NOTE: While using Finisar AOC SFP+ optical module with the QFX5130-48C switch, you
may need to pull the module upwards to pull out the module smoothly from the cage.

NOTE: "

Figure 137: Install a Transceiver

1— Ejector lever

Install a QSFP28 Transceiver

Before you install a transceiver in a device, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for
safe handling of lasers (see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings).

Ensure that you have a rubber safety cap available to cover the transceiver.

The transceivers for Juniper Networks devices are hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable
units (FRUs). You can remove and replace the transceivers without powering off the device or disrupting
the device functions.
185

NOTE: After you insert a transceiver or after you change the media-type configuration, wait for
6 seconds for the interface to display operational commands.

NOTE: We recommend that you use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased
from Juniper Networks with your Juniper Networks device.

CAUTION: The Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) provides


complete support for Juniper-supplied optical modules and cables. However, JTAC does
not provide support for third-party optical modules and cables that are not qualified or
supplied by Juniper Networks. If you face a problem running a Juniper device that uses
third-party optical modules or cables, JTAC may help you diagnose host-related issues if
the observed issue is not, in the opinion of JTAC, related to the use of the third-party
optical modules or cables. Your JTAC engineer will likely request that you check the
third-party optical module or cable and, if required, replace it with an equivalent
Juniper-qualified component.
Use of third-party optical modules with high-power consumption (for example,
coherent ZR or ZR+) can potentially cause thermal damage to or reduce the lifespan of
the host equipment. Any damage to the host equipment due to the use of third-party
optical modules or cables is the users’ responsibility. Juniper Networks will accept no
liability for any damage caused due to such use.

To install a QSFP28 transceiver (see Figure 138 on page 186):

1. Wrap and fasten one end of an ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end of
the strap to the ESD point on the switch.
2. Verify that a rubber safety cap covers the QSFP28 transceiver.
3. Position the transceiver in front of the port on the device so that the QSFP28 connector faces the
port.
186

Figure 138: Install a QSFP28 Transceiver

4. Slide the transceiver into the port until the locking pins lock in place. If there is resistance, remove
the transceiver and flip it so that the connector faces the other direction.
5. Remove the rubber safety cap from the transceiver and the end of the cable, and insert the cable into
the transceiver.

LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends
of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cable connected to a
transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or


removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and protects your eyes from
accidental exposure to laser light.

6. If there is a cable management system, arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent
the cable from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it does not support its
own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in the
cable management system. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do not allow
fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.
187

Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable

Before you connect a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in a device, ensure that you
have taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers (see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines
and Warnings).

To connect a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in a device:

LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of
fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to
transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

1. If the fiber-optic cable connector is covered with a rubber safety cap, remove the cap. Save the cap.
2. Remove the rubber safety cap from the optical transceiver. Save the cap.
3. Insert the cable connector into the optical transceiver (see Figure 139 on page 187).

Figure 139: Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable to an Optical Transceiver Installed in a Device

Fiber-optic Transceiver
cable

g000704

4. Secure the cables so that they do not support their own weight. Place excess cable out of the way in
a neatly coiled loop. Placing fasteners on a loop helps cables maintain their shape.

CAUTION: Do not bend fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.
Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow fastened
loops of cables to dangle, which stresses the cables at the fastening point.
188

Connect the QFX5120 to External Devices

IN THIS SECTION

Connect a Device to a Network for Out-of-Band Management | 188

Connect a Device to a Management Console Using an RJ‑45 Connector | 189

Connecting 1-PPS and 10-MHz Measurement Devices to the QFX5120 Switch | 191

Connect a Device to a Network for Out-of-Band Management

Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable that has an RJ-45 connector at either end. Figure 140 on page
188 shows the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable.

Figure 140: RJ-45 Connector on an Ethernet Cable

You can monitor and manage these devices by using a dedicated management channel. Each device has
a management port to which you can connect an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector. Use the
management port to connect the device to the management device.

To connect a device to a network for out-of-band management (see Figure 141 on page 189):

1. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the management port on the device.
2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the management device.
189

Figure 141: Connect a Device to a Network for Out-of-Band Management

Connect a Device to a Management Console Using an RJ‑45 Connector

Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable that has an RJ-45 connector at either end and an RJ-45-to-DB-9
serial port adapter.

Figure 142 on page 189 shows the RJ-45 connector on the Ethernet cable.

Figure 142: RJ-45 Connector on an Ethernet Cable

NOTE: We no longer include the RJ-45 console cable with the DB-9 adapter as part of the
device package. If the console cable and adapter are not included in your device package, or if
you need a different type of adapter, you can order the following separately:

• RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-DB9)

• RJ-45 to USB-A adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBA)

• RJ-45 to USB-C adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBC)


190

If you want to use RJ-45 to USB-A or RJ-45 to USB-C adapter you must have X64 (64-Bit)
Virtual COM port (VCP) driver installed on your PC. See, https://ftdichip.com/drivers/vcp-
drivers/ to download the driver.

NOTE: If your laptop or desktop PC does not have a DB-9 plug connector pin and you want to
connect your laptop or desktop PC directly to the device, use a combination of the RJ-45-to-
DB-9 socket adapter and a USB-to-DB-9 plug adapter. You must provide the USB-to-DB-9 plug
adapter.

You can configure and manage your network devices using a dedicated management channel. Each
device has a console port that you can connect to using an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector. Use
the console port to connect the device to the console server or management console. The console port
accepts a cable that has an RJ-45 connector.

To connect the device to a management console (see Figure 143 on page 190 and Figure 144 on page
190):

1. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the console port (labeled CON, CONSOLE, or CON1) on
the device.
2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the console server (see Figure 143 on page 190) or
management console (see Figure 144 on page 190).

Figure 143: Connect a Device to a Management Console Through a Console Server

Figure 144: Connect a Device Directly to a Management Console


191

Connecting 1-PPS and 10-MHz Measurement Devices to the QFX5120


Switch

Before you connect a QFX5120-48T or QFX5120-48YM switch to measurement devices:

• Ensure that the measurement equipment is compatible with transistor-transistor logic (TTL) (5.0 V).

• Ensure that you have a cable with length up to 3 m.

QFX5120-48T and QFX5120-48YM switches have one 2x1 DIN 1.0/2.3 connector that supports 1-
PPS-OUT and 10-MHz-OUT measurement ports, labeled PPS OUT and 10M OUT, on the rear panel of
the switch.

To connect the DIN cable to the external measurement device:

1. Connect one end of the DIN cable connectors to the 1-PPS-OUT and the 10-MHz-OUT ports,
labeled PPS OUT and 10M OUT, on the rear panel of the switch.
2. Connect the other end of the DIN cable connectors to the measurement equipment.

Configure Junos OS on the QFX5120

IN THIS SECTION

QFX5120 Default Configuration | 191

Connect and Configure a QFX5120 Switch | 192

QFX5120 Default Configuration

We ship each QFX5120 switch programmed with a factory-default configuration that contains the
values set for each configuration parameter. The default configuration file sets values for system
parameters such as the system log and file messages.

When you commit changes to the configuration, a new configuration file is created that becomes the
active configuration. You can always revert to the factory-default configuration.
192

This topic shows the factory-default configuration file of a QFX5120 switch:

system {
syslog {
user * {
any emergency;
}
file messages {
any notice;
authorization info;
}
file interactive-commands {
interactive-commands any;
}
}
commit {
factory-settings;
}
}

Connect and Configure a QFX5120 Switch

Before you connect and configure a QFX5120, set the following parameter values on the console server
or desktop PC:

• Baud Rate—9600

• Data—8

• Flow Control—None

• Parity—None

• Stop Bits—1

• DCD State—Disregard

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• An Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector attached—not provided

• An RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter—not provided


193

• A management host such as a laptop or desktop PC, with a serial port—not provided

Have the following information available before you configure custom settings for the switch:

• Root password

• IP address of the default gateway

• IP address of the management port

• IP address of a DNS server

• (Optional) Hostname

• (Optional) IP address of a backup router

• (Optional) SNMP read community, location, and contact to configure SNMP parameters

• (Optional) Static routes to remote subnets with access to the management port

• (Optional) Static routes to remote prefixes with access to the management port

We ship the QFX5120 switch with Junos OS preinstalled and ready to be configured when you power
on the switch. You must perform the initial configuration of the QFX5120 through the console port
(labeled CON) on the switch by using the command-line interface (CLI).

This procedure describes how to perform the initial configuration on the switch and to connect it to the
network. For the complete information about enabling the switch to forward traffic, including examples,
see the Junos OS configuration guides.

NOTE: We no longer include the RJ-45 console cable with the DB-9 adapter as part of the
device package. If the console cable and adapter are not included in your device package, or if
you need a different type of adapter, you can order the following separately:

• RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-DB9)

• RJ-45 to USB-A adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBA)

• RJ-45 to USB-C adapter (JNP-CBL-RJ45-USBC)

If you want to use RJ-45 to USB-A or RJ-45 to USB-C adapter you must have X64 (64-Bit)
Virtual COM port (VCP) driver installed on your PC. See, https://ftdichip.com/drivers/vcp-
drivers/ to download the driver.

To perform the initial configuration on the switch and to connect it to the network:

1. Power the switch on.


194

2. Connect the console port (labeled CON) on the switch to a management host such as a laptop or
desktop PC by using an RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter.
3. At the Junos OS login prompt, type root to log in. You don't need to enter a password. If the
software boots before you connect to the console port, you might need to press the Enter key on
the keyboard for the prompt to appear.

login: root

4. Start the CLI.

root@:RE:0% cli
root>

5. Enter the configuration mode.

root> configure
[edit]
root#

6. Add a password to the root administration user account. Enter a plain-text password, an encrypted
password, or an SSH public key string.
Plain-text password:

[edit]
root# set system root-authentication plain-text-password
New password: password
Retype new password: password

Encrypted password:

[edit]
root# set system root-authentication encrypted-password encrypted-password

[edit]
root# set system root-authentication ssh-ecdsa public-key
195

SSH-ECDSA password:

[edit]
root# set system root-authentication ssh-ed25519 public-key

SSH-RSA password:

[edit]
root# set system root-authentication ssh-rsa public-key

7. (Optional) Configure the hostname of the switch. If the name includes spaces, enclose the name in
double quotation marks (“ ”).

[edit]
root# set system host-name host-name

8. (Optional) Create a user account.

[edit]
root# set system login user user-name authentication plain-text-password
New password: password
Retype new password: password

9. (Optional) Set the user account class to super-user.

[edit]
root# set system login user user-name class super-user

10. (Optional) Configure the domain name of the switch.

[edit]
root# set system domain-name domain-name

11. Configure the default gateway.

[edit]
root# set routing-options static route 0/0 next-hop address
196

12. Configure the IP address and prefix length for the management interface on the switch.

[edit]
root# set interfaces em0 unit 0 family inet address address/prefix-length

NOTE: The management port em0 (labeled MGMT) is located on the front panel of the
QFX5120-32C switch. The management port em0 (labeled MGMT) is located on the rear
panel of the QFX5120-48T switch. The management ports em0 (labeled C0) and em1 (labeled
C1) are located on the rear panel of the QFX5120-48Y and QFX5120-48YM switches.

13. (Optional) Configure the IP address of a backup router, which is used only while the routing
protocol is not running.

[edit]
root# set system backup-router address

14. Configure the IP address of a DNS server.

[edit]
root# set system name-server address

15. (Optional) Configure the static routes to remote subnets with access to the management port.
Access to the management port is limited to the local subnet.

[edit]
root# set routing-options static route remote-subnet next-hop destination-IP retain no-
readvertise

16. (Optional) Configure the static routes to remote prefixes with access to the management port.

[edit]
root# set routing-options static route remote-prefix next-hop destination-IP retain no-
readvertise
197

17. Configure the SSH service.

[edit]
root# set system services ssh root-login allow

18. Configure in-band management or out-of-band management:

• With in-band management, you can configure a network port interface as the management
interface and connect it to the management device. In this scenario, you can do either of the
following:

• Use the automatically created VLAN named default for management of all data interfaces as
members of the default VLAN. Specify the management IP address and the default gateway.

• Create a new management VLAN. Specify the VLAN name, VLAN ID, management IP
address, and default gateway. Select the ports that must be part of this VLAN.

• With out-of-band management, you use a dedicated management channel (MGMT, C0, or C1
port) to connect to the management device. Specify the IP address and gateway of the
management interface. Use this IP address to connect to the switch.
19. (Optional) Specify the SNMP read community, location, and contact to configure SNMP parameters.
20. (Optional) Specify the system date and time. Select the time zone from the list. The configured
parameters are displayed.
21. Enter yes to commit the configuration. The configuration is committed as the active configuration
for the switch.
22. (Optional) Display the configuration to verify that it is correct.

[edit]
root# show
system {
host-name host-name;
domain-name domain-name;
root-authentication {
authentication-method (password | public-key);
}
name-server {
address;
}
}
interfaces {
em0 {
unit 0 {
198

family inet {
address address/prefix-length;
}
}
}
}

23. (Optional) Configure additional properties by adding the necessary configuration statements.
24. Commit the configuration to activate it on the switch.

[edit]
root# commit

25. When you have finished configuring the switch, exit the configuration mode.

[edit]
root@switch# exit
root@switch>

You can now log in by using the CLI and continue configuring the switch.
4 CHAPTER

Maintaining Components

Maintain the QFX5120 Cooling System | 200

Maintain the QFX5120 Power System | 204

Maintain Transceivers | 211

Maintain Fiber-Optic Cables | 221


200

Maintain the QFX5120 Cooling System

IN THIS SECTION

Remove a Fan Module from a QFX5120 Switch | 200

Install a Fan Module in a QFX5120 Switch | 202

Remove a Fan Module from a QFX5120 Switch

Before you remove a fan module in from the switch, ensure that you have the following parts and tools
available:

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

• An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat—not provided

• A replacement fan module

We ship QFX5120-32C switches with 5+1 redundant fans preinstalled in the rear panel. We ship
QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches with 4+1 redundant fans preinstalled in
the rear panel. The fan modules are hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable units (FRUs)
installed in the rear panel of the switch: You can remove and replace them without powering off the
switch or disrupting switch functions.

1. Place the antistatic bag or the antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
2. Loosen the captive screws on the front faceplate of the fan module by using the screwdriver.

WARNING: To prevent injury, do not touch the fan with your hands or any tools as you
slide the fan module out of the chassis—the fan might still be running.

3. Grasp the handle on the fan module and pull it firmly to slide the fan module out of the chassis.
Figure 145 on page 201 shows how to remove a fan module from a QFX5120-32C switch. Figure
147 on page 201 shows how to remove a fan module from a QFX5120-48T or QFX5120-48Y
switch. Figure 146 on page 201 shows how to remove a fan module from a QFX5120-48YM switch.
201

Figure 145: Remove a Fan Module from a QFX5120-32C Switch

Figure 146: Remove a Fan Module from a QFX5120-48T or QFX5120-48Y Switch

Figure 147: Remove a Fan Module from a QFX5120-48YM Switch

4. Place the fan module in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat, stable surface.
202

NOTE: You must install all the fan modules and they must be operational for optimal
functioning of the switch.

CAUTION: Do not mix:

• Fan modules with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Fan modules and power supplies with different airflow directions in the same
chassis.

5. Install the replacement fan.

Install a Fan Module in a QFX5120 Switch

Before you install a fan module in the switch:

• Ensure that you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage (see Prevention of
Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

• Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• ESD grounding strap—not provided

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

We ship QFX5120-32C switches with 5+1 redundant fans preinstalled in the rear panel. We ship
QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches with 4+1 redundant fans preinstalled in
the rear panel. The fan modules are hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable units (FRUs)
installed in the rear panel of the switch: You can remove and replace them without powering off the
switch or disrupting switch functions.

CAUTION: Do not mix:

• Fan modules with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Power supplies with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Fan modules and power supplies with different airflow directions in the same
chassis.
203

NOTE: If you have a Juniper J-Care service contract, register any addition, change, or upgrade of
hardware components at https://www.juniper.net/customers/support/tools/updateinstallbase/.
Failure to do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts. This note does not
apply if you replace existing components with the same type of component.

1. Ensure that you have the correct fan module.


If you are installing a fan module with the label F2B in a QFX5120-32C switch, verify that the color
of the handle of the power supply installed is red. If you are installing a fan module with the label B2F
in a QFX5120-32C switch, verify that the of the handle of the power supply installed is blue.

If you are installing a fan module with the label AIR OUT in a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or
QFX5120-48YM switch, verify that the color of the handle of the power supply installed is Juniper
Gold. If you are installing a fan module with the label AIR IN in a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or
QFX5120-48YM switch, verify that the of the handle of the power supply installed is Juniper Azure
Blue.
2. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to the ESD point on the switch.
3. Remove the fan module from its bag.
4. Hold the handle of the fan module with one hand and support the weight of the module with the
other hand. Place the fan module in the fan module slot on the rear panel of the switch and slide it in
until it is fully seated.
5. Tighten the captive screws on the faceplate of the fan module by using the screwdriver. The
recommended torque value is 4.34 lb-in. (0.49 Nm). See Figure 148 on page 203, Figure 149 on page
204, and Figure 150 on page 204.

Figure 148: Install a Fan Module in a QFX5120-32C Switch


204

Figure 149: Install a Fan Module in a QFX5120-48T or QFX5120-48Y Switch

Figure 150: Install a Fan Module in a QFX5120-48YM Switch

Maintain the QFX5120 Power System

IN THIS SECTION

Remove a Power Supply from a QFX5120 Switch | 205

Install a Power Supply in a QFX5120 Switch | 208


205

Remove a Power Supply from a QFX5120 Switch

Before you remove a power supply from a QFX5120 switch:

• Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage (see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

• Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• ESD grounding strap—not provided

• Antistatic bag or an antistatic mat—not provided

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

We ship QFX5120 switches with two AC or DC power supplies preinstalled in the rear panel. Each
power supply is a hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable unit (FRU) when the second power
supply is installed and running. You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or
disrupting switch functions.

CAUTION: Replace the power supply with a new power supply within one minute of
removal to prevent chassis overheating.

To remove a power supply from a QFX5120 switch:

1. Place the antistatic bag or the antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
2. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to the ESD point on the switch.

NOTE: If only one power supply is installed in your QFX5120, you need to power off the
switch before removing the power supply.

3. Disconnect power to the switch:

• AC power supply—If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the off position. If
the AC power source outlet does not have a power switch, gently pull out the plug end of the
power cord connected to the power source outlet.

• DC power supply—Switch the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit to
the off position.
4. Remove the power source cable from the power supply faceplate:
206

• AC power supply—Remove the power cord from the power supply faceplate by detaching the
power cord retainer and gently pulling out the socket end of the power cord connected to the
power supply faceplate.

• DC power supply—Remove the screws securing the ring lugs attached to the power source cables
to the power supply using the screwdriver, and remove the power source cables from the power
supply. Replace the screws on the terminals and tighten them.

• High-voltage power supply—Press the latch on the power cord and remove the power source
cables from the power supply.
5. • On the QFX5120-32C switch, push the ejector lever inward.

• On the QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switch, push the ejector lever toward
the handle until it stops.
6. Grasp the power supply handle and pull firmly to slide the power supply halfway out of the chassis.
7. Place one hand under the power supply to support it and slide it completely out of the chassis. Take
care not to touch power supply components, pins, leads, or solder connections.
Figure 151 on page 206 shows how to remove an AC power supply from a QFX5120-32C switch
and Figure 152 on page 207 shows how to remove a DC power supply from a QFX5120-32C switch.

Figure 153 on page 207 shows how to remove an AC power supply from a QFX5120-48T or
QFX5120-48Y switch. The procedure to remove a high-voltage power supply is the same as the
procedure to remove a power supply from a QFX5120-48T switch. Figure 154 on page 207 shows
how to remove an AC power supply from a QFX5120-48YM switch. Figure 155 on page 208 shows
how to remove a DC power supply from a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switch.

Figure 151: Remove an AC Power Supply from a QFX5120-32C Switch


207

Figure 152: Remove a DC Power Supply from a QFX5120-32C Switch

Figure 153: Remove an AC Power Supply from a QFX5120-48T or QFX5120-48Y Switch

Figure 154: Remove an AC Power Supply from a QFX5120-48YM Switch


208

Figure 155: Remove a DC Power Supply from a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM


Switch

8. Place the power supply in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat, stable surface.

NOTE: You must install both the power supplies and they must be operational for optimal
functioning of the switch.

9. Install the replacement power supply.

Install a Power Supply in a QFX5120 Switch

Before you install a power supply:

• Ensure that you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage (see Prevention of
Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

• Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• ESD grounding strap—not provided

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

Each power supply is a hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable unit (FRU) when the second
power supply is installed and running. You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or
disrupting switch functions.

CAUTION: Do not mix:

• AC and DC power supplies in the same chassis.


209

• 650-W and 850-W power supplies in the same QFX5120-48T chassis.

• Power supplies with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

• Power supplies and fan modules with different airflow directions in the same chassis.

NOTE: You must connect each power supply to a dedicated power source outlet.

To install a power supply in the switch:

1. Ensure that you have the correct power supply.


If you are installing a power supply with a red handle in a QFX5120-32C switch, verify that the label
on the fan module installed is F2B. If you are installing a power supply with a blue handle in a
QFX5120-32C switch, verify that the label on the fan module installed is B2F.

If you are installing a power supply with a Juniper Gold handle in a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or
QFX5120-48YM switch, verify that the label on the fan module installed is AIR OUT. If you are
installing a power supply with a Juniper Azure Blue handle in a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or
QFX5120-48YM switch, verify that the label on the fan module installed is AIR IN.
2. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to the ESD point on the switch.
3. Taking care not to touch power supply pins, leads, or solder connections, remove the power supply
from the bag.
4. Using both hands, place the power supply in the power supply slot on the rear panel of the switch
and slide it in until it is fully seated and the ejector lever fits into place.
Figure 156 on page 210 shows how to install an AC power supply in a QFX5120-32C switch and
Figure 157 on page 210 shows how to install a DC power supply in a QFX5120-32C switch.

Figure 158 on page 210 shows how to install an AC power supply in a QFX5120-48T or
QFX5120-48Y switch. The procedure to install a high-voltage power supply is the same as the
procedure to install an AC power supply in a QFX5120-48T switch. Figure 159 on page 211 shows
how to install an AC power supply in a QFX5120-48YM switch. Figure 160 on page 211 shows how
to install a DC power supply in a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM switch.
210

Figure 156: Install an AC Power Supply in a QFX5120-32C Switch

Figure 157: Install a DC Power Supply in a QFX5120-32C Switch

Figure 158: Install an AC Power Supply in a QFX5120-48T or QFX5120-48Y Switch


211

Figure 159: Install an AC Power Supply in a QFX5120-48YM Switch

Figure 160: Install a DC Power Supply in a QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, or QFX5120-48YM


Switch

Maintain Transceivers

IN THIS SECTION

Remove a Transceiver | 212

Remove a QSFP28 Transceiver | 214

Install a Transceiver | 216

Install a QSFP28 Transceiver | 219


212

Remove a Transceiver

Before you remove a transceiver from a device, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions
for the safe handling of lasers (see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat

• Rubber safety caps to cover the transceiver and fiber-optic cable connector

• A dust cover to cover the port or a replacement transceiver

The transceivers for Juniper Networks devices are hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable
units (FRUs). You can remove and replace the transceivers without powering off the device or disrupting
device functions.

NOTE: After you remove a transceiver, or when you change the media-type configuration, wait
for 6 seconds for the interface to display the operational commands.

Figure 161 on page 214 shows how to remove a QSFP+ transceiver. The procedure is the same for all
types of transceivers except the QSFP28 and CFP transceivers.

To remove a transceiver from a device:

1. Place the antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.


2. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to the ESD point on the switch.
3. Label the cable connected to the transceiver so that you can reconnect it correctly.

LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends
of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to
transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

LASER WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when


inserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and protects
your eyes from accidental exposure to laser light.
213

CAUTION: Do not bend fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.

4. Remove the cable connected to the transceiver (see Disconnect a Fiber-Optic Cable). Cover the
transceiver and the end of each fiber-optic cable connector with a rubber safety cap immediately
after disconnecting the fiber-optic cables.
5. If there is a cable management system, arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent
it from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it does not support its own
weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable
management system. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Do not bend the fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.

6. To remove an SFP56-DD, SFP, SFP+, XFP, a QSFP+, or QSFP56-DD transceiver:

a. Using your fingers, pull open the ejector lever on the transceiver to unlock the transceiver.
Note that QSFP-DD and SFP-DD transceivers don't have ejector levers, they have a pull tab
instead which can be used to unlock and remove the transceiver.

CAUTION: Before removing the transceiver, make sure that you open the ejector
lever completely until you hear it click. This precaution prevents damage to the
transceiver.

b. Grasp the transceiver ejector lever and gently slide the transceiver approximately 0.5 in. (1.3 cm)
straight out of the port.

CAUTION: To prevent ESD damage to the transceiver, do not touch the connector
pins at the end of the transceiver.
214

Figure 161: Remove a QSFP+ Transceiver

1— Ejector lever

To remove a CFP transceiver:

a. Using your fingers, loosen the screws on the transceiver.

b. Grasp the screws on the transceiver and gently slide the transceiver approximately 0.5 in. (1.3 cm)
straight out of the port.

CAUTION: To prevent ESD damage to the transceiver, do not touch the connector
pins at the end of the transceiver.

7. Using your fingers, grasp the body of the transceiver and pull it straight out of the port.
8. Place the transceiver in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat, stable surface.
9. Place the dust cover over the empty port, or install the replacement transceiver.

Remove a QSFP28 Transceiver

Before you remove a transceiver from a device, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions
for safe handling of lasers (see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings).

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat

• Rubber safety caps to cover the transceiver and fiber-optic cable connector

• A dust cover to cover the port or a replacement transceiver

The transceivers for Juniper Networks devices are hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable
units (FRUs). You can remove and replace the transceivers without powering off the device or disrupting
the device functions.
215

NOTE: After you insert a transceiver, or after you change the media-type configuration, wait for
6 seconds for the interface to display operational commands.

NOTE: We recommend that you use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased
from Juniper Networks with your Juniper Networks device.

To remove a QSFP28 transceiver (see Figure 162 on page 216):

1. Place an antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the QSFP28 transceiver.
Have a rubber safety cap ready for the QSFP28 transceiver and the cable.
2. Wrap and fasten one end of an ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end of
the strap to the ESD point on the switch.
3. Label the cable connected to the QSFP28 transceiver so that you can later reconnect it to the correct
QSFP28 transceiver.
4. Disconnect the cable from the transceiver. Immediately cover the transceiver and the end of the
cable with a rubber safety cap.

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered, except when inserting or


removing a cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and protects your eyes from
accidental exposure to laser light.

5. If there is a cable management system, arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent
it from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it does not support its own
weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable
management system. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Do not bend the fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.
216

Figure 162: Remove a QSFP28 Transceiver

6. Pull the ejector tab straight back. The locking pins on the transceiver automatically release the
transceiver.
7. Place the transceiver on the antistatic mat or in the antistatic bag.
8. Place the dust cover over the empty port, or install the replacement transceiver.

Install a Transceiver

Before you install a transceiver in a device, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for
safe handling of lasers (see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings).

Ensure that you have a rubber safety cap available to cover the transceiver.

The transceivers for Juniper Networks devices are hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable
units (FRUs). You can remove and replace the transceivers without powering off the device or disrupting
the device functions.

NOTE: After you insert a transceiver or after you change the media-type configuration, wait for
6 seconds for the interface to display operational commands.

NOTE: We recommend that you use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased
from Juniper Networks with your Juniper Networks device.

CAUTION: The Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) provides


complete support for Juniper-supplied optical modules and cables. However, JTAC does
not provide support for third-party optical modules and cables that are not qualified or
supplied by Juniper Networks. If you face a problem running a Juniper device that uses
third-party optical modules or cables, JTAC may help you diagnose host-related issues if
217

the observed issue is not, in the opinion of JTAC, related to the use of the third-party
optical modules or cables. Your JTAC engineer will likely request that you check the
third-party optical module or cable and, if required, replace it with an equivalent
Juniper-qualified component.
Use of third-party optical modules with high-power consumption (for example,
coherent ZR or ZR+) can potentially cause thermal damage to or reduce the lifespan of
the host equipment. Any damage to the host equipment due to the use of third-party
optical modules or cables is the users’ responsibility. Juniper Networks will accept no
liability for any damage caused due to such use.

Figure 163 on page 219 shows how to install a QSFP+ transceiver. The procedure is the same for all
types of transceivers except the QSFP28 and CFP transceivers.

To install a transceiver:

CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to the transceiver, do not


touch the connector pins at the end of the transceiver.

1. Wrap and fasten one end of the ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end
of the strap to the ESD point on the switch.
2. Remove the transceiver from its bag.
3. Check to see whether the transceiver is covered with a rubber safety cap. If it is not, cover the
transceiver with a rubber safety cap.

LASER WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when


inserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and protects
your eyes from accidental exposure to laser light.

4. If the port in which you want to install the transceiver is covered with a dust cover, remove the dust
cover and save it in case you need to cover the port later. If you are hot-swapping a transceiver, wait
for at least 10 seconds after removing the transceiver from the port before installing a new
transceiver.
5. Using both hands, carefully place the transceiver in the empty port. The connectors must face the
chassis.

CAUTION: Before you slide the transceiver into the port, ensure that the transceiver is
aligned correctly. Misalignment might cause the pins to bend, making the transceiver
unusable.
218

6. Slide the transceiver in gently until it is fully seated. If you are installing a CFP transceiver, use your
fingers to tighten the captive screws on the transceiver.
7. Remove the rubber safety cap from the transceiver and the end of the cable, and insert the cable into
the transceiver.

LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends
of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cable connected to a
transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or


removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and protects your eyes from
accidental exposure to laser light.

8. If there is a cable management system, arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent
the cable from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it does not support its
own weight as it hangs toward the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in
the cable management system. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do not allow
fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.

NOTE: When you install SFP-DD transceivers, push it hard until you hear a click sound. Use a
long nose plier to pull the SFP-DD transceiver connected on the top and bottom rows of the
chassis where the pull tabs face each other.

NOTE: Make sure to use a dust cap to cover ports that are unused.
219

NOTE: While using Finisar AOC SFP+ optical module with the QFX5130-48C switch, you
may need to pull the module upwards to pull out the module smoothly from the cage.

NOTE: "

Figure 163: Install a Transceiver

1— Ejector lever

Install a QSFP28 Transceiver

Before you install a transceiver in a device, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for
safe handling of lasers (see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings).

Ensure that you have a rubber safety cap available to cover the transceiver.

The transceivers for Juniper Networks devices are hot-removable and hot-insertable field-replaceable
units (FRUs). You can remove and replace the transceivers without powering off the device or disrupting
the device functions.

NOTE: After you insert a transceiver or after you change the media-type configuration, wait for
6 seconds for the interface to display operational commands.
220

NOTE: We recommend that you use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased
from Juniper Networks with your Juniper Networks device.

CAUTION: The Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) provides


complete support for Juniper-supplied optical modules and cables. However, JTAC does
not provide support for third-party optical modules and cables that are not qualified or
supplied by Juniper Networks. If you face a problem running a Juniper device that uses
third-party optical modules or cables, JTAC may help you diagnose host-related issues if
the observed issue is not, in the opinion of JTAC, related to the use of the third-party
optical modules or cables. Your JTAC engineer will likely request that you check the
third-party optical module or cable and, if required, replace it with an equivalent
Juniper-qualified component.
Use of third-party optical modules with high-power consumption (for example,
coherent ZR or ZR+) can potentially cause thermal damage to or reduce the lifespan of
the host equipment. Any damage to the host equipment due to the use of third-party
optical modules or cables is the users’ responsibility. Juniper Networks will accept no
liability for any damage caused due to such use.

To install a QSFP28 transceiver (see Figure 164 on page 220):

1. Wrap and fasten one end of an ESD wrist strap around your bare wrist, and connect the other end of
the strap to the ESD point on the switch.
2. Verify that a rubber safety cap covers the QSFP28 transceiver.
3. Position the transceiver in front of the port on the device so that the QSFP28 connector faces the
port.

Figure 164: Install a QSFP28 Transceiver

4. Slide the transceiver into the port until the locking pins lock in place. If there is resistance, remove
the transceiver and flip it so that the connector faces the other direction.
221

5. Remove the rubber safety cap from the transceiver and the end of the cable, and insert the cable into
the transceiver.

LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends
of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cable connected to a
transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or


removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and protects your eyes from
accidental exposure to laser light.

6. If there is a cable management system, arrange the cable in the cable management system to prevent
the cable from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it does not support its
own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in the
cable management system. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do not allow
fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at the fastening point.

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.

Maintain Fiber-Optic Cables

IN THIS SECTION

Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable | 222

Disconnect a Fiber-Optic Cable | 223

How to Handle Fiber-Optic Cables | 223


222

Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable

Before you connect a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in a device, ensure that you
have taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers (see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines
and Warnings).

To connect a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in a device:

LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends of
fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to
transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

1. If the fiber-optic cable connector is covered with a rubber safety cap, remove the cap. Save the cap.
2. Remove the rubber safety cap from the optical transceiver. Save the cap.
3. Insert the cable connector into the optical transceiver (see Figure 165 on page 222).

Figure 165: Connect a Fiber-Optic Cable to an Optical Transceiver Installed in a Device

Fiber-optic Transceiver
cable
g000704

4. Secure the cables so that they do not support their own weight. Place excess cable out of the way in
a neatly coiled loop. Placing fasteners on a loop helps cables maintain their shape.

CAUTION: Do not bend fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius. An arc
smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that
are difficult to diagnose.
Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allow fastened
loops of cables to dangle, which stresses the cables at the fastening point.
223

Disconnect a Fiber-Optic Cable

Before you disconnect a fiber-optic cable from an optical transceiver, ensure that you have taken the
necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers. See Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• A rubber safety cap to cover the transceiver

• A rubber safety cap to cover the fiber-optic cable connector

Juniper Networks devices have optical transceivers to which you can connect fiber-optic cables.

To disconnect a fiber-optic cable from an optical transceiver installed in the device:

1. Disable the port in which the transceiver is installed by issuing the following command:

[edit interfaces]
user@device# set interface-name disable

LASER WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the ends
of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cables connected to
transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.

2. Carefully unplug the fiber-optic cable connector from the transceiver.


3. Cover the transceiver with a rubber safety cap.

LASER WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when


inserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and protects
your eyes from accidental exposure to laser light.

4. Cover the fiber-optic cable connector with the rubber safety cap.

How to Handle Fiber-Optic Cables

Fiber-optic cables connect to optical transceivers that are installed in Juniper Networks devices.

Follow these guidelines when handling fiber-optic cables:


224

• When you unplug a fiber-optic cable from a transceiver, place rubber safety caps over the transceiver
and on the end of the cable.

• Anchor fiber-optic cables to prevent stress on the connectors. When attaching a fiber-optic cable to
a transceiver, be sure to secure the fiber-optic cable so that it does not support its own weight as it
hangs to the floor. Never let a fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector.

• Avoid bending fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius. Bending fiber-optic cables into
arcs smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that are
difficult to diagnose.

• Frequent plugging and unplugging of fiber-optic cables in and out of optical instruments can damage
the instruments, which are expensive to repair. To prevent damage from overuse, attach a short fiber
extension to the optical equipment. The short fiber extension absorbs wear and tear due to frequent
plugging and unplugging, which is easier and less expensive to replace than the instruments.

• Keep fiber-optic cable connections clean. Microdeposits of oil and dust in the canal of the transceiver
or cable connector can cause loss of light, reduction in signal power, and possibly intermittent
problems with the optical connection.

• To clean the transceiver canal, use an appropriate fiber-cleaning device such as RIFOCS Fiber
Optic Adaptor Cleaning Wands (part number 946). Follow the instructions in the cleaning kit you
use.

• After cleaning the transceiver, make sure that the connector tip of the fiber-optic cable is clean.
Use only an approved alcohol-free fiber-optic cable cleaning kit such as the Opptex Cletop-
S®Fiber Cleaner. Follow the instructions in the cleaning kit you use.
5 CHAPTER

Troubleshooting Hardware

Troubleshoot the QFX5120 Device | 226


226

Troubleshoot the QFX5120 Device

IN THIS SECTION

Alarm Types and Severity Levels | 226

Chassis Alarm Messages | 228

Creating an Emergency Boot Device for QFX Series Switches | 232

Recovering the Installation Using an Emergency Boot Device on QFX Series Switches | 234

Alarm Types and Severity Levels

The QFX Series switches support different alarm types and severity levels. Table 61 on page 226
provides a list of alarm terms and definitions that may help you in monitoring the device.

Table 61: Alarm Terms and Definitions

Term Definition

Alarm Signal that alerts you to conditions that might prevent normal operation.
On the device, alarm indicators might include an LCD panel and LEDs on
the device. The LCD panel (if present on the device) displays the chassis
alarm message count. Blinking amber or yellow LEDs indicate yellow
alarm conditions for chassis components.

Alarm condition Failure event that triggers an alarm.


227

Table 61: Alarm Terms and Definitions (Continued)

Term Definition

Alarm severity levels Seriousness of the alarm. The level of severity can be either major (red) or
minor (yellow).

• Major (red)—Indicates a critical situation on the device that has


resulted from one of the following conditions. A red alarm condition
requires immediate action.

• One or more hardware components have failed.

• One or more hardware components have exceeded temperature


thresholds.

• An alarm condition configured on an interface has triggered a


critical warning.

• Minor (yellow or amber)—Indicates a noncritical condition on the


device that, if left unchecked, might cause an interruption in service or
a degradation in performance. A yellow alarm condition requires
monitoring or maintenance. For example, a missing rescue
configuration generates a yellow system alarm.

Alarm types Alarms include the following types:

• Chassis alarm—Predefined alarm triggered by a physical condition on


the device such as a power supply failure or excessive component
temperature.

• Interface alarm—Alarm that you configure to alert you when an


interface link is down. Applies to ethernet, fibre-channel, and
management-ethernet interfaces. You can configure a red (major) or
yellow (minor) alarm for the link-down condition, or have the
condition ignored.

• System alarm—Predefined alarm that might be triggered by a missing


rescue configuration, failure to install a license for a licensed software
feature, or high disk usage.
228

Chassis Alarm Messages

Chassis alarms indicate a failure on the device or one of its components. Chassis alarms are preset and
cannot be modified.

Chassis alarms on QFX5100, QFX5110, QFX5210, and QFX5120 devices have two severity levels:

• Major (red)—Indicates a critical situation on the device that has resulted from one of the conditions
described in Table 62 on page 228. A red alarm condition requires immediate action.

• Minor (yellow)—Indicates a noncritical condition on the device that, if left unchecked, might cause an
interruption in service or degradation in performance. A yellow alarm condition requires monitoring
or maintenance.

Table 62 on page 228 describes the chassis alarm messages on QFX5100, QFX5110, QFX5200,
QFX5210, and QFX5120 devices.

Table 62: Chassis Alarm Messages

Component Alarm Type CLI Message Recommended Action

Fans Major (red) Fan Failure Replace the fan module and report
the failure to customer support.

Fan I2C Failure Check the system log for one of the
following error messages and report
the message to customer support:

• CM ENV Monitor: Get fan speed


failed.

• fan-number is NOT spinning @


correct speed, where fan-number
can be 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.

Fan fan-number Not Spinning Remove and check the fan module
for obstructions, and then reinsert
the fan module. If the problem
persists, replace the fan module.
229

Table 62: Chassis Alarm Messages (Continued)

Component Alarm Type CLI Message Recommended Action

Minor (yellow) Fan/Blower Absent Check the system log for the error
message fan-number Absent, where
fan-number can be can be 1, 2, 3, 4,
or 5.

Install fan modules in the slots


where they are absent.

Power supplies Major (red) PEM pem-number Airflow not matching Replace the power supply with a
Chassis Airflow power supply that supports the
same airflow direction as supported
by the chassis.

PEM pem-number I2C Failure Check the system log for one of the
following error messages and report
the message to customer support:

• I2C Read failed for device


number, where number where
number ranges from 123
through 125.

• PS number: Transitioning from


online to offline, where power
supply number is 1 or 2.

PEM pem-number is not powered Check the power cord connection


and reconnect, if necessary.

PEM pem-number is not supported Replace the power supply with a


supported power supply.

PEM pem-number Not OK Indicates a problem with the


incoming AC power or outgoing DC
power. Report the error to customer
support.
230

Table 62: Chassis Alarm Messages (Continued)

Component Alarm Type CLI Message Recommended Action

Minor (yellow) PEM pem-number Absent Reboot the switch after removing
one of the power supply. The
switch can continue to operate with
a single power supply.

OR

Replace the removed power supply


and reboot the switch.

PEM pem-number Power Supply Type Check whether there is a mix of AC


Mismatch and DC power supplies in the same
chassis. Reboot the switch with only
AC or only DC power supplies.

PEM pem-number Removed Replace the removed power supply


or reboot the switch. The switch
can continue to operate with a
single power supply.

Temperature Major (red) sensor-location Temp Sensor Fail Check the system log for the
sensors following error message and report
the message to customer support:

Temp sensor sensor-number failed,


where sensor-number ranges from
1 through 10.

sensor-location Temp Sensor Too Hot Check environmental conditions


and alarms on other devices. Ensure
that environmental factors (such as
hot air blowing around the
equipment) do not affect the
temperature sensor. If the condition
persists, the device might shut
down.
231

Table 62: Chassis Alarm Messages (Continued)

Component Alarm Type CLI Message Recommended Action

Minor (yellow) sensor-location Temp Sensor Too Check environmental conditions


Warm and alarms on other devices. Ensure
that environmental factors (such as
hot air blowing around the
equipment) do not affect the
temperature sensor.

Routing Engine Minor (yellow) RE RE number /var partition usage Clean up the system file storage
is high space on the switch. For more
information, see Cleaning Up the
System File Storage Space.

Major (red) RE RE number /var partition is full Clean up the system file storage
space on the switch. For more
information, see Cleaning Up the
System File Storage Space.

Minor (yellow) Rescue configuration is not set Use the request system
configuration rescue save command
to set the rescue configuration. For
more information, see Setting or
Deleting the Rescue Configuration.

Feature usage requires a license Install the required license for the
feature specified in the alarm. For
or more information, see Software
Features That Require Licenses on
License for feature expired
the QFX Series.
232

Table 62: Chassis Alarm Messages (Continued)

Component Alarm Type CLI Message Recommended Action

Management Major (red) Management Ethernet 1 Link Down Check whether a cable is connected
Ethernet to the management Ethernet
interface interface, or whether the cable is
defective. Replace the cable, if
required.

On models that have both em0 and


em1 management interfaces
available, you must connect both
interfaces. If both interfaces are not
connected, the alarm is raised.
However, the alarm has no service
impact.

If you are unable to resolve the


problem, open a support case by
using the Case Manager link at
https://www.juniper.net/support/ or
call 1-888-314-5822 (tollfree, US or
1-408-745-9500 (from outside the
United States).

Creating an Emergency Boot Device for QFX Series Switches

Before you begin, you need to download the installation media image for your device and Junos OS
release from https://www.juniper.net/customers/support/ .

If Junos OS on the device is damaged in some way that prevents the software from loading properly, you
can use an emergency boot device to repartition the primary disk and load a fresh installation of
Junos OS. Use the following procedure to create an emergency boot device.

NOTE: You can create the emergency boot device on another Juniper Networks device, or any
laptop or desktop PC that supports Linux. The steps you take to create the emergency boot
device vary, depending on the device.

To create an emergency boot device:


233

1. Use FTP to copy the installation media image into the /var/tmp directory on the device.
2. Insert a USB storage device into the USB port.
3. From the CLI, start the shell:

user@device> start shell


%

4. Use the gunzip command to unzip the image file.


5. Switch to the root account using the su command:

% su
Password: password

NOTE: The password is the root password for the device. If you logged in to the device as the
root user, you do not need to perform this step.

6. Enter the following command on the device:

root@device% dd if=/var/tmp/filename of=/dev/da0 bs=1m

The device writes the installation media image to the USB storage device:

root@device% dd if=install-media-qfx-5e-15.1X53-D30.5-domestic.img of=/dev/da0 bs=1m


1399+0 records in
1399+0 records out
1466957824 bytes transferred in 394.081902 secs (3722469 bytes/sec)

7. Log out of the shell:

root@device% exit
% exit
user@device>
234

Recovering the Installation Using an Emergency Boot Device on QFX


Series Switches

If Junos OS on your device is damaged in some way that prevents the software from loading correctly,
you may need to perform a recovery installation using an emergency boot device (for example, a USB
flash drive) to restore the default factory installation. Once you have recovered the software, you need
to restore the device configuration. You can either create a new configuration as you did when the
device was shipped from the factory, or if you saved the previous configuration, you can simply restore
that file to the device.

If at all possible, you should try to perform the following steps before you perform the recovery
installation:

1. Ensure that you have an emergency boot device to use during the installation. See Creating an
Emergency Boot Device for QFX Series Switches for information on how to create an emergency
boot device.

2. Copy the existing configuration in the file /config/juniper.conf.gz from the device to a remote
system, such as a server, or to an emergency boot device. For extra safety, you can also copy the
backup configurations (the files named /config/juniper.conf.n, where n is a number from 0 through 9)
to a remote system or to an emergency boot device.

You can use the system snapshot feature to complete this step. The system snapshot feature takes a
“snapshot” of the files currently used to run the QFX Series switch—the complete contents of the /
config and /var directories, which include the running Junos OS, the active configuration, and the
rescue configuration—and copies all of these files into a memory source. See Creating a Snapshot and
Using It to Boot a QFX Series Switch.

NOTE: System snapshot is not supported on QFX10000 and QFX5200 switches.

CAUTION: The recovery installation process completely overwrites the entire contents
of the internal flash storage.

3. Copy any other stored files to a remote system as desired.

To reinstall Junos OS:

1. Connect to the device's console port (either directly or through a console server).

2. Insert the emergency boot device into the QFX Series switch.
235

3. Reboot or power cycle the device.

4. As soon as the device reboots, keep pressing Esc until the boot options menu opens.

Press Esc for boot options


...
Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU @ 2.50GHz 2.50 GHz
V0018.8 16384 MB RAM
Continue
Boot Manager
Device Manager
Boot From File
Setup Utility

NOTE: You might have to reboot or power cycle the device more than once if you miss
hitting Esc to open the boot options menu.

5. In the boot options menu, select Boot Manager.

6. In the Boot Manager menu, select the emergency boot device. In this example, the emergency boot
device is the USB device.

NOTE: In later releases, the Boot Manager menu might display two different entries for the
same USB recovery device. Select the EFI USB Device entry.

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Boot Manager │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Boot Option Menu

SSD0 : ATP M.2 2242


IBA GE Slot 0101 v1350
IBA GE Slot 0102 v1350
USB : General Udisk
SSD1 : ATP M.2 2242
IBA GE Slot 0103 v1350
EFI HDD Device (ATP M.2 2242)
Internal EFI Shell
236

The Juniper Linux Installer or GNU GRUB menu opens. The menu and options may differ slightly
depending on the platform and release.

7. If you have Junos OS software from the factory installed on the emergency boot device, the
software prompts you with the following options:

Juniper Linux Installer - (c) Juniper Networks 2014


Reboot
Install Juniper Linux Platform
Boot to host shell [debug]

Select Install Juniper Linux Platform to install the Junos OS software from the emergency boot
device.

NOTE: Depending on the platform and release, you may see different entries such as Install
Juniper Linux, Install Juniper Linux Platform, or Install Juniper Linux with secure boot
support.

8. The device copies the software from the emergency boot device, occasionally displaying status
messages. Copying the software can take up to 12 minutes.

9. After the software is copied to the device, the device reboots from the internal flash storage on
which the software was just installed.

NOTE: If the Boot Manager menu includes both SSD drive and EFI HDD Device entries,
manually select the EFI HDD Device option.

When the reboot is complete, the device displays the Junos OS login prompt:

root@switch#

10. Create a new configuration as you did when the device was shipped from the factory, or restore the
previously saved configuration file to the device.

11. Remove the emergency boot device.


6 CHAPTER

Contacting Customer Support and


Returning the Chassis or Components

Return a QFX5120 Chassis or Components | 238


238

Return a QFX5120 Chassis or Components

IN THIS SECTION

How to Return a QFX5120 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement | 238

Locate the Serial Number on a QFX5120 Switch or Component | 239

Contact Customer Support to Obtain a Return Material Authorization | 249

Pack a QFX5120 Switch or Component for Shipping | 250

How to Return a QFX5120 Switch or Component for Repair or


Replacement

If you need to return a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement,
follow this procedure:

1. Determine the serial number of the chassis if you need to return the switch. If you need to return
one or more components, determine the serial number for each component. For instructions, see
"Locate the Serial Number on a QFX5120 Switch or Component" on page 239.
2. Obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number from Juniper Networks Technical Assistance
Center (JTAC) as described in Contact Customer Support to Obtain Return Material Authorization.

NOTE: Do not return any component to Juniper Networks unless you have first obtained an
RMA number. Juniper Networks reserves the right to refuse shipments that do not have an
RMA. Refused shipments are returned to the customer through collect freight.

3. Pack the switch or component for shipping.

For more information about return and repair policies, see the customer support page at https://
www.juniper.net/support/guidelines.html.
239

Locate the Serial Number on a QFX5120 Switch or Component

IN THIS SECTION

List the Switch and Components Details with the CLI | 239

Locate the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on a QFX5120 Switch | 240

Locate the Serial Number ID Labels on FRUs in a QFX5120 Switch | 241

If you are returning a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement, you
must locate the serial number of the switch or component. You must provide the serial number to the
Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) when you contact them to obtain Return Material
Authorization (RMA).

If the switch is operational and you can access the CLI, you can list serial numbers for the switch and for
some components with a CLI command. If you do not have access to the CLI or if the serial number for
the component does not appear in the command output, you can locate the serial number ID label on
the physical switch or component.

NOTE: If you want to find the serial number on the physical switch component, you will need to
remove the component from the switch chassis, for which you must have the required parts and
tools available.

List the Switch and Components Details with the CLI


To list the switch and switch components and their serial numbers, enter the following CLI command:

show chassis hardware

The following output lists the switch components and serial numbers for a QFX5120-48Y switch; the
output is similar for other QFX5120 switches:

user@switch> show chassis hardware


Hardware inventory:
Item Version Part number Serial number Description
Chassis PD3113060008 QFX5120 48Y
Routing Engine 0 REV D 650-044930 PD3113060008 QFX5120-48Y
FPC 0 REV D 650-044930 PD3113060008 QFX5120-48PY PIC 2 REV A0
240

611-044925 MY3112490109 4x 1G/10G SFP/SFP+


Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-030658 AD0946A02ZT SFP+-10G-USR
Xcvr 1 REV 01 740-030658 AA1212ALZ5E SFP+-10G-USR
Power Supply 0 REV 01 740-046871 1EDA2490663 JPSU-1100-AC-AFO-A
Power Supply 1 REV 01 740-046873 1EDE2430149 JPSU-350-AC-AFO-A
Fan Tray 0 Fan Module, Airflow Out (AFO)
Fan Tray 1 Fan Module, Airflow Out (AFO)

Locate the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on a QFX5120 Switch


The serial number ID label is located on the top panel of the chassis on QFX5120-32C switches and on
the right panel on QFX5120-48T, QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches. Figure 166 on page
240 shows the location of the serial number ID label on QFX5120-32C switches. Figure 167 on page
240 shows the location of the serial number ID label on QFX5120-48T switches. Figure 168 on page
241 shows the location of the serial number ID label on QFX5120-48Y switches. Figure 169 on page
241 shows the location of the serial number ID label on QFX5120-48YM switches.

Figure 166: Location of the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on QFX5120-32C Switches

1— Chassis serial number ID label

Figure 167: Location of the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on QFX5120-48T Switches

1— Chassis serial number ID label


241

Figure 168: Location of the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on QFX5120-48Y Switches

1— Chassis serial number ID label

Figure 169: Location of the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on QFX5120-48YM Switches

1— Chassis serial number ID label

Locate the Serial Number ID Labels on FRUs in a QFX5120 Switch


The power supplies and fan module installed in QFX5120 switches are field-replaceable units (FRUs).

You must remove these FRUs from the switch chassis to see the serial number ID label.

Power Supply—The serial number ID label is on the top of the power supply.

Figure 170 on page 242 shows the location of the serial number ID label on the AC power supply for
QFX5120-32C switches. Figure 171 on page 242 shows the location of the serial number ID label on
the DC power supply for QFX5120-32C switches.

Figure 172 on page 243 shows the location of the serial number ID label on the AC power supply for
QFX5120-48T switches. Figure 173 on page 243 shows the location of the serial number ID label on
the DC power supply for QFX5120-48T switches. Figure 174 on page 244 shows the location of the
serial number ID label on the high-voltage power supply for QFX5120-48T switches.

Figure 175 on page 244 shows the location of the serial number ID label on the AC power supply for
QFX5120-48Y switches. Figure 176 on page 245 shows the location of the serial number ID label on
the DC power supply for QFX5120-48Y switches.
242

Figure 177 on page 245 shows the location of the serial number ID label on the AC power supply for
QFX5120-48YM switches. Figure 178 on page 246 shows the location of the serial number ID label on
the DC power supply for QFX5120-48YM switches.

Figure 170: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the AC Power Supply for QFX5120-32C
Switches

1— Serial number ID label on the AC power


supply for QFX5120-32C switches

Figure 171: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the DC Power Supply for QFX5120-32C
Switches

1— Serial number ID label on the DC power


supply for QFX5120-32C switches
243

Figure 172: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the AC Power Supply for QFX5120-48T
Switches

1— Serial number ID label on the AC power


supply for QFX5120-48T switches

Figure 173: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the DC Power Supply for QFX5120-48T
Switches

1— Serial number ID label on the DC power


supply for QFX5120-48T switches
244

Figure 174: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the High-Voltage Power Supply for
QFX5120-48T Switches

1— Serial number ID label on the high-voltage


power supply for QFX5120-48T switches

Figure 175: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the AC Power Supply for QFX5120-48Y
Switches

1— Serial number ID label on the AC power


supply for QFX5120-48Y switches
245

Figure 176: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the DC Power Supply for QFX5120-48Y
Switches

1— Serial number ID label on the DC power


supply for QFX5120-48Y switches

Figure 177: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the AC Power Supply for QFX5120-48YM
Switches

1— Serial number ID label on the AC power


supply for QFX5120-48YM switches
246

Figure 178: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the DC Power Supply for QFX5120-48YM
Switches

1— Serial number ID label on the DC power


supply for QFX5120-48YM switches

Fan Module—The serial number ID label is at the top panel of the fan module for QFX5120-32C
switches. The serial number ID label is at the bottom panel of the fan module for QFX5120-48T,
QFX5120-48Y, and QFX5120-48YM switches.

Figure 179 on page 247 shows the location of the serial number ID label on the fan module for
QFX5120-32C switches.

Figure 180 on page 247 shows the location of the serial number ID label on the fan module for
QFX5120-48T switches.

Figure 181 on page 248 shows the location of the serial number ID label on the fan module for
QFX5120-48Y switches.

Figure 182 on page 248 shows the location of the serial number ID label on the fan module for
QFX5120-48YM switches.
247

Figure 179: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the Fan Module for QFX5120-32C Switches

1— Serial number ID label on the fan module for


QFX5120-32C switches

Figure 180: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the Fan Module for QFX5120-48T Switches

1— Serial number ID label on the fan module for


QFX5120-48T switches
248

Figure 181: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the Fan Module for QFX5120-48Y Switches

1— Serial number ID label on the fan module for


QFX5120-48Y switches

Figure 182: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the Fan Module for QFX5120-48YM Switches

1— Serial number ID label on the fan module for


QFX5120-48YM switches
249

Contact Customer Support to Obtain a Return Material Authorization

If you need to return a device or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement,
obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number from Juniper Networks Technical Assistance
Center (JTAC). You must obtain an RMA number before you attempt to return the component.

After locating the serial number of the device or hardware component you want to return, open a
service request with the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) on the Web or by
telephone.

Before you request an RMA number from JTAC, be prepared to provide the following information:

• Your existing service request number, if you have one

• Serial number of the component

• Your name, organization name, telephone number, fax number, and shipping address

• Details of the failure or problem

• Type of activity being performed on the device when the problem occurred

• Configuration data displayed by one or more show commands

You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day, seven days a week on the Web or by telephone:

• Service Request Manager: https://support.juniper.net/support

• Telephone: +1-888-314-JTAC (+1-888-314-5822), toll free in U.S., Canada, and Mexico

NOTE: For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll free numbers, see https://
support.juniper.net/support.

If you are contacting JTAC by telephone, enter your 12-digit service request number followed by the
pound (#) key for an existing case, or press the star (*) key to be routed to the next available support
engineer.

The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number for return of the
component.
250

Pack a QFX5120 Switch or Component for Shipping

IN THIS SECTION

Pack a QFX5120 Switch for Shipping | 250

Pack QFX5120 Switch Components for Shipping | 251

If you are returning a QFX5120 switch or component to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement,
pack the item as described in this topic.

Before pack the switch or component, ensure that you have:

• Followed all the steps listed in Contact Customer Support to Obtain Return Material Authorization.

• Retrieved the original shipping carton and packing materials. Contact your JTAC representative if you
do not have these materials, to learn about approved packing materials (see Contact Customer
Support to Obtain Return Material Authorization).

• Ensure that you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage (see Prevention of
Electrostatic Discharge Damage).

Pack a QFX5120 Switch for Shipping


Before you pack the switch:

1. On the console or other management device connected to the switch, enter the CLI operational
mode and issue the following command to shut down the switch software:

user@switch> request system halt

Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted.

2. Disconnect power from the switch.

3. Remove the cables that connect the switch to external devices.

4. Remove all optical transceivers installed in the switch (see Remove a Transceiver).

If you need to transport the switch to another location or return the switch to Juniper Networks, you
need to pack the switch securely in its original packaging to prevent damage during transportation.

Ensure that you have the following parts and tools:


251

• Number 2 Phillips (+) screwdriver—not provided

• The original switch packing material (cardboard box, accessory box and its contents, and foam
padding)

• ESD grounding strap—not provided

• Antistatic bag—not provided

CAUTION: Do not pack the switch in anything except its original container, or the
switch might be damaged in transit.

To pack the switch:

1. If the switch is installed in a rack or cabinet, have one person support the weight of the switch
while another person unscrews and removes the mounting screws.
2. Remove the switch from the rack or cabinet and place the switch on a flat, stable surface.
3. Use the screwdriver to remove the rack mounting brackets from the switch chassis.
4. Place the switch in an antistatic bag.
5. Place the bottom portion of the packaging foam in the shipping carton.
6. Place the switch inside the cavity in the bottom packaging foam.
7. Place the top portion of the packaging foam on top of the switch.
8. If you are returning accessories or field-replaceable units (FRUs) with the switch, pack them as
instructed in "Pack QFX5120 Switch Components for Shipping" on page 251.
9. Place the accessory box by the rear end of the chassis in the shipping carton.
10. Close the top of the cardboard shipping box and seal it with packing tape.
11. Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.

Pack QFX5120 Switch Components for Shipping


Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:

• Antistatic bag, one for each component—not provided

• ESD grounding strap—not provided

To pack the switch components, follow the instructions here.

CAUTION: Do not stack switch components. Return individual components in separate


boxes if they do not fit together on one level in the shipping box.

To pack the switch components:


252

• Place individual components in antistatic bags.

• Use the original packing materials if they are available. If the original packing materials are not
available, ensure the component is adequately packed to prevent damage during transit. The packing
material you use must be able to support the weight of the component.

• Ensure that the components are adequately protected by wrapping them well with packing materials.
Pack the component in an oversized box (if the original box is not available) with extra packing
material around the unit so that the component is prevented from moving around inside the box.

• Securely tape the box closed.

• Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.
7 CHAPTER

Safety and Compliance Information

General Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 255

Definitions of Safety Warning Levels | 256

Qualified Personnel Warning | 258

Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden | 258

Fire Safety Requirements | 259

Installation Instructions Warning | 260

Chassis and Component Lifting Guidelines | 261

Restricted Access Warning | 261

Ramp Warning | 263

Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings | 263

Grounded Equipment Warning | 267

Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning | 268

Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 269

Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 272

General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings | 278

Action to Take After an Electrical Accident | 279

Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage | 280

AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines | 281

AC Power Disconnection Warning | 282

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines | 283


DC Power Disconnection Warning | 284

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning | 286

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning | 286

DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning | 288

Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning | 289

TN Power Warning | 290

Agency Approvals for QFX5120 Switches | 291

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for the QFX Series | 293

Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive Compliance | 297


255

General Safety Guidelines and Warnings

The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the device from damage. The list of
guidelines might not address all potentially hazardous situations in your working environment, so be
alert and exercise good judgment at all times.

• Perform only the procedures explicitly described in the hardware documentation for this device.
Make sure that only authorized service personnel perform other system services.

• Keep the area around the device clear and free from dust before, during, and after installation.

• Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over them while walking.

• Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry, such as rings, bracelets, or chains, which could become caught
in the device.

• Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be hazardous to your eyes.

• Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the equipment unsafe.

• Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle.

• Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms.

• Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed for wet
environments.

• Operate the device only when it is properly grounded.

• Follow the instructions in this guide to properly ground the device to earth.

• Replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating.

• Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet-metal parts unless instructions are provided in the
hardware documentation for this device. Such an action could cause severe electrical shock.

• Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame. Such an action could
result in electrical shock or fire.

• Avoid spilling liquid onto the chassis or onto any device component. Such an action could cause
electrical shock or damage the device.

• Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been disconnected from their
power source. Such an action could cause electrical shock.
256

• Some parts of the chassis, including AC and DC power supply surfaces, power supply unit handles,
SFB card handles, and fan tray handles might become hot. The following label provides the warning
for hot surfaces on the chassis:

• Always ensure that all modules, power supplies, and cover panels are fully inserted and that the
installation screws are fully tightened.

Definitions of Safety Warning Levels

The documentation uses the following levels of safety warnings (there are two Warning formats):

NOTE: You might find this information helpful in a particular situation, or you might overlook this
important information if it was not highlighted in a Note.

CAUTION: You need to observe the specified guidelines to prevent minor injury or
discomfort to you or severe damage to the device.
Attention Veillez à respecter les consignes indiquées pour éviter toute incommodité ou
blessure légère, voire des dégâts graves pour l’appareil.

LASER WARNING: This symbol alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.
Avertissement Ce symbole signale un risque de blessure provoquée par rayon laser.

WARNING: This symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily
injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with
electrical circuitry, and familiarize yourself with standard practices for preventing
accidents.
257

Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie


die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken,
dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient
u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen.

Varoitus Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi johtaa
ruumiinvammaan. Ennen kuin työskentelet minkään laitteiston parissa, ota selvää
sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien
ehkäisykeinoista.

Avertissement Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans


une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de
travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers posés par les circuits
électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment utilisées pour éviter
les accidents.

Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die
zu einer Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an irgendeinem
Gerät beginnen, seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren
und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unfällen bewußt.

Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe


causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre
conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche
standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.

Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan føre
til personskade. Før du utfører arbeid på utstyr, må du vare oppmerksom på de
faremomentene som elektriske kretser innebærer, samt gjøre deg kjent med vanlig
praksis når det gjelder å unngå ulykker.

Aviso Este símbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situação que lhe poderá
causar danos físicos. Antes de começar a trabalhar com qualquer equipamento,
familiarize-se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos eléctricos, e com quaisquer
práticas comuns que possam prevenir possíveis acidentes.

¡Atención! Este símbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física.
Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgos que entraña la corriente
eléctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes.

Varning! Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan
leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara
medveten om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanligt förfarande för att förebygga
skador.
258

Qualified Personnel Warning

WARNING: Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace the device.
Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind en bevoegd
personeel uitgevoerd worden.

Varoitus Ainoastaan koulutettu ja pätevä henkilökunta saa asentaa tai vaihtaa tämän
laitteen.

Avertissement Tout installation ou remplacement de l'appareil doit être réalisé par du


personnel qualifié et compétent.

Warnung Gerät nur von geschultem, qualifiziertem Personal installieren oder


auswechseln lassen.

Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzato ad installare


o sostituire questo apparecchio.

Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig opplæring bør montere eller bytte ut dette
utstyret.

Aviso Este equipamento deverá ser instalado ou substituído apenas por pessoal
devidamente treinado e qualificado.

¡Atención! Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazados exclusivamente por


personal técnico adecuadamente preparado y capacitado.

Varning! Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildad och
kvalificerad personal.

Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden

WARNING: The equipment must be connected to an earthed mains socket-outlet.


Advarsel Apparatet skal kobles til en jordet stikkontakt.

Varning! Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat nätuttag.


259

Fire Safety Requirements

IN THIS SECTION

Fire Suppression | 259

Fire Suppression Equipment | 259

In the event of a fire emergency, the safety of people is the primary concern. You should establish
procedures for protecting people in the event of a fire emergency, provide safety training, and properly
provision fire-control equipment and fire extinguishers.

In addition, you should establish procedures to protect your equipment in the event of a fire emergency.
Juniper Networks products should be installed in an environment suitable for electronic equipment. We
recommend that fire suppression equipment be available in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the
equipment and that all local fire, safety, and electrical codes and ordinances be observed when you
install and operate your equipment.

Fire Suppression

In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire, you should first turn power off to the equipment
at the source. Then use a Type C fire extinguisher, which uses noncorrosive fire retardants, to extinguish
the fire.

Fire Suppression Equipment

Type C fire extinguishers, which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon dioxide and Halotron™,
are most effective for suppressing electrical fires. Type C fire extinguishers displace oxygen from the
point of combustion to eliminate the fire. For extinguishing fire on or around equipment that draws air
from the environment for cooling, you should use this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher
instead of an extinguisher that leaves residues on equipment.

Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers (dry chemical fire extinguishers). The
primary ingredient in these fire extinguishers is monoammonium phosphate, which is very sticky and
260

difficult to clean. In addition, in the presence of minute amounts of moisture, monoammonium


phosphate can become highly corrosive and corrodes most metals.

Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged is subject to
premature failure and unreliable operation. The equipment is considered to be irreparably damaged.

NOTE: To keep warranties effective, do not use a dry chemical fire extinguisher to control a fire
at or near a Juniper Networks device. If a dry chemical fire extinguisher is used, the unit is no
longer eligible for coverage under a service agreement.

We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an environmentally


responsible manner.

Installation Instructions Warning

WARNING: Read the installation instructions before you connect the device to a power
source.
Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie-aanwijzingen voordat u het systeem met de
voeding verbindt.

Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen järjestelmän yhdistämistä virtalähteeseen.

Avertissement Avant de brancher le système sur la source d'alimentation, consulter les


directives d'installation.

Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen, bevor Sie das System an die
Stromquelle anschließen.

Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il sistema


all'alimentatore.

Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene før systemet kobles til strømkilden.

Aviso Leia as instruções de instalação antes de ligar o sistema à sua fonte de energia.

¡Atención! Ver las instrucciones de instalación antes de conectar el sistema a la red de


alimentación.

Varning! Läs installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dess


strömförsörjningsenhet.
261

Chassis and Component Lifting Guidelines

• Before moving the device to a site, ensure that the site meets the power, environmental, and
clearance requirements.

• Before lifting or moving the device, disconnect all external cables and wires.

• As when lifting any heavy object, ensure that your legs bear most of the weight rather than your
back. Keep your knees bent and your back relatively straight. Do not twist your body as you lift.
Balance the load evenly and be sure that your footing is firm.

• Use the following lifting guidelines to lift devices and components:

• Up to 39.7 lb (18 kg): One person.

• From 39.7 lb (18 kg) to 70.5 lb (32 kg): Two or more people.

• From 70.5 lb (32 kg) to 121.2 lb (55 kg): Three or more people.

• Above 121.2 lb (55 kg): Use material handling systems (such as levers, slings, lifts, and so on).
When this is not practical, engage specially trained persons or systems (such as riggers or movers).

Restricted Access Warning

WARNING: This unit is intended for installation in restricted access areas. A restricted
access area is an area to which access can be gained only by service personnel through
the use of a special tool, lock and key, or other means of security, and which is
controlled by the authority responsible for the location.
Waarschuwing Dit toestel is bedoeld voor installatie op plaatsen met beperkte toegang.
Een plaats met beperkte toegang is een plaats waar toegang slechts door
servicepersoneel verkregen kan worden door middel van een speciaal instrument, een
slot en sleutel, of een ander veiligheidsmiddel, en welke beheerd wordt door de
overheidsinstantie die verantwoordelijk is voor de locatie.

Varoitus Tämä laite on tarkoitettu asennettavaksi paikkaan, johon pääsy on rajoitettua.


Paikka, johon pääsy on rajoitettua, tarkoittaa paikkaa, johon vain huoltohenkilöstö
pääsee jonkin erikoistyökalun, lukkoon sopivan avaimen tai jonkin muun turvalaitteen
avulla ja joka on paikasta vastuussa olevien toimivaltaisten henkilöiden valvoma.
262

Avertissement Cet appareil est à installer dans des zones d'accès réservé. Ces dernières
sont des zones auxquelles seul le personnel de service peut accéder en utilisant un outil
spécial, un mécanisme de verrouillage et une clé, ou tout autre moyen de sécurité.
L'accès aux zones de sécurité est sous le contrôle de l'autorité responsable de
l'emplacement.

Warnung Diese Einheit ist zur Installation in Bereichen mit beschränktem Zutritt
vorgesehen. Ein Bereich mit beschränktem Zutritt ist ein Bereich, zu dem nur
Wartungspersonal mit einem Spezialwerkzeugs, Schloß und Schlüssel oder anderer
Sicherheitsvorkehrungen Zugang hat, und der von dem für die Anlage zuständigen
Gremium kontrolliert wird.

Avvertenza Questa unità deve essere installata in un'area ad accesso limitato. Un'area
ad accesso limitato è un'area accessibile solo a personale di assistenza tramite
un'attrezzo speciale, lucchetto, o altri dispositivi di sicurezza, ed è controllata
dall'autorità responsabile della zona.

Advarsel Denne enheten er laget for installasjon i områder med begrenset adgang. Et
område med begrenset adgang gir kun adgang til servicepersonale som bruker et
spesielt verktøy, lås og nøkkel, eller en annen sikkerhetsanordning, og det kontrolleres
av den autoriteten som er ansvarlig for området.

Aviso Esta unidade foi concebida para instalação em áreas de acesso restrito. Uma área
de acesso restrito é uma área à qual apenas tem acesso o pessoal de serviço autorizado,
que possua uma ferramenta, chave e fechadura especial, ou qualquer outra forma de
segurança. Esta área é controlada pela autoridade responsável pelo local.

¡Atención! Esta unidad ha sido diseñada para instalarse en áreas de acceso restringido.
Área de acceso restringido significa un área a la que solamente tiene acceso el personal
de servicio mediante la utilización de una herramienta especial, cerradura con llave, o
algún otro medio de seguridad, y que está bajo el control de la autoridad responsable
del local.

Varning! Denna enhet är avsedd för installation i områden med begränsat tillträde. Ett
område med begränsat tillträde får endast tillträdas av servicepersonal med ett speciellt
verktyg, lås och nyckel, eller annan säkerhetsanordning, och kontrolleras av den
auktoritet som ansvarar för området.
263

Ramp Warning

WARNING: When installing the device, do not use a ramp inclined at more than 10
degrees.
Waarschuwing Gebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek van meer dan 10 graden.

Varoitus Älä käytä sellaista kaltevaa pintaa, jonka kaltevuus ylittää 10 astetta.

Avertissement Ne pas utiliser une rampe dont l'inclinaison est supérieure à 10 degrés.

Warnung Keine Rampen mit einer Neigung von mehr als 10 Grad verwenden.

Avvertenza Non usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi.

Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader.

Aviso Não utilize uma rampa com uma inclinação superior a 10 graus.

¡Atención! No usar una rampa inclinada más de 10 grados.

Varning! Använd inte ramp med en lutning på mer än 10 grader.

Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings

Ensure that the rack or cabinet in which the device is installed is evenly and securely supported. Uneven
mechanical loading could lead to a hazardous condition.

WARNING: To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing the device in a rack,
take the following precautions to ensure that the system remains stable. The following
directives help maintain your safety:

• Install the device in a rack that is secured to the building structure.

• Mount the device at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack.

• When mounting the device on a partially filled rack, load the rack from the bottom
to the top, with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack.
264

• If the rack is provided with stabilizing equipment, install the stabilizers before
mounting or servicing the device in the rack.

Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel in een rek


monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft, moet u speciale voorzorgsmaatregelen
nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabiel blijft. De onderstaande richtlijnen
worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid te verzekeren:

• De Juniper Networks switch moet in een stellage worden geïnstalleerd die aan een
bouwsel is verankerd.

• Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd te worden als het toestel het enige
in het rek is.

• Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert, dient u het rek van
onderen naar boven te laden met het zwaarste onderdeel onderaan in het rek.

• Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen, dient u de stabilisatoren te


monteren voordat u het toestel in het rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt
geeft.

Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa telineessä, on
noudatettava erityisiä varotoimia järjestelmän vakavuuden säilyttämiseksi, jotta
vältytään loukkaantumiselta. Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita:

• Juniper Networks switch on asennettava telineeseen, joka on kiinnitetty


rakennukseen.

• Jos telineessä ei ole muita laitteita, aseta laite telineen alaosaan.

• Jos laite asetetaan osaksi täytettyyn telineeseen, aloita kuormittaminen sen


alaosasta kaikkein raskaimmalla esineellä ja siirry sitten sen yläosaan.

• Jos telinettä varten on vakaimet, asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista telineeseen


tai sen huoltamista siinä.

Avertissement Pour éviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opérations de montage
ou de réparation de cette unité en casier, il convient de prendre des précautions
spéciales afin de maintenir la stabilité du système. Les directives ci-dessous sont
destinées à assurer la protection du personnel:

• Le rack sur lequel est monté le Juniper Networks switch doit être fixé à la structure
du bâtiment.
265

• Si cette unité constitue la seule unité montée en casier, elle doit être placée dans le
bas.

• Si cette unité est montée dans un casier partiellement rempli, charger le casier de
bas en haut en plaçant l'élément le plus lourd dans le bas.

• Si le casier est équipé de dispositifs stabilisateurs, installer les stabilisateurs avant de


monter ou de réparer l'unité en casier.

Warnung Zur Vermeidung von Körperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser
Einheit in einem Gestell müssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen, um
sicherzustellen, daß das System stabil bleibt. Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur
Gewährleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen:

• Der Juniper Networks switch muß in einem Gestell installiert werden, das in der
Gebäudestruktur verankert ist.

• Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist, sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht
werden.

• Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefüllten Gestell ist das Gestell von
unten nach oben zu laden, wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell
anzubringen ist.

• Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehör geliefert, sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren
zu installieren, bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten.

Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici durante il montaggio o la manutenzione di questa


unità in un supporto, occorre osservare speciali precauzioni per garantire che il sistema
rimanga stabile. Le seguenti direttive vengono fornite per garantire la sicurezza
personale:

• Il Juniper Networks switch deve essere installato in un telaio, il quale deve essere
fissato alla struttura dell'edificio.

• Questa unità deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto, se si tratta dell'unica unità
da montare nel supporto.

• Quando questa unità viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno, caricare il


supporto dal basso all'alto, con il componente più pesante sistemato sul fondo del
supporto.

• Se il supporto è dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti, installare tali dispositivi prima di


montare o di procedere alla manutenzione dell'unità nel supporto.
266

Advarsel Unngå fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid på denne


enheten når den befinner seg i et kabinett. Vær nøye med at systemet er stabilt.
Følgende retningslinjer er gitt for å verne om sikkerheten:

• Juniper Networks switch må installeres i et stativ som er forankret til


bygningsstrukturen.

• Denne enheten bør monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste enheten i
kabinettet.

• Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt, skal kabinettet
lastes fra bunnen og opp med den tyngste komponenten nederst i kabinettet.

• Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr, skal stabilisatorene installeres før


montering eller utføring av reparasjonsarbeid på enheten i kabinettet.

Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta unidade numa
estante, deverá tomar precauções especiais para se certificar de que o sistema possui
um suporte estável. As seguintes directrizes ajudá-lo-ão a efectuar o seu trabalho com
segurança:

• O Juniper Networks switch deverá ser instalado numa prateleira fixa à estrutura do
edificio.

• Esta unidade deverá ser montada na parte inferior da estante, caso seja esta a única
unidade a ser montada.

• Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada, coloque os itens mais
pesados na parte inferior da estante, arrumando-os de baixo para cima.

• Se a estante possuir um dispositivo de estabilização, instale-o antes de montar ou


reparar a unidade.

¡Atención! Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre un bastidor,
oeriormente durante su mantenimiento, se debe poner mucho cuidado en que el
sistema quede bien estable. Para garantizar su seguridad, proceda según las siguientes
instrucciones:

• El Juniper Networks switch debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a la estructura del


edificio.

• Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor, cuando sea la única unidad en el
mismo.
267

• Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado,


comenzar la instalación desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocando el equipo
más pesado en la parte inferior.

• Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores, instalar éstos antes de montar


o proceder al mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor.

Varning! För att undvika kroppsskada när du installerar eller utför underhållsarbete på
denna enhet på en ställning måste du vidta särskilda försiktighetsåtgärder för att
försäkra dig om att systemet står stadigt. Följande riktlinjer ges för att trygga din
säkerhet:

• Juniper Networks switch måste installeras i en ställning som är förankrad i


byggnadens struktur.

• Om denna enhet är den enda enheten på ställningen skall den installeras längst ned
på ställningen.

• Om denna enhet installeras på en delvis fylld ställning skall ställningen fyllas nedifrån
och upp, med de tyngsta enheterna längst ned på ställningen.

• Om ställningen är försedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast innan


enheten installeras eller underhålls på ställningen.

Grounded Equipment Warning

WARNING: This device must be properly grounded at all times. Follow the instructions
in this guide to properly ground the device to earth.
Waarschuwing Dit apparaat moet altijd goed geaard zijn. Volg de instructies in deze
gids om het apparaat goed te aarden.

Varoitus Laitteen on oltava pysyvästi maadoitettu. Maadoita laite asianmukaisesti


noudattamalla tämän oppaan ohjeita.

Avertissement L’appareil doit être correctement mis à la terre à tout moment. Suivez les
instructions de ce guide pour correctement mettre l’appareil à la terre.

Warnung Das Gerät muss immer ordnungsgemäß geerdet sein. Befolgen Sie die
Anweisungen in dieser Anleitung, um das Gerät ordnungsgemäß zu erden.
268

Avvertenza Questo dispositivo deve sempre disporre di una connessione a massa.


Seguire le istruzioni indicate in questa guida per connettere correttamente il dispositivo
a massa.

Advarsel Denne enheten på jordes skikkelig hele tiden. Følg instruksjonene i denne
veiledningen for å jorde enheten.

Aviso Este equipamento deverá estar ligado à terra. Siga las instrucciones en esta guía
para conectar correctamente este dispositivo a tierra.

¡Atención! Este dispositivo debe estar correctamente conectado a tierra en todo


momento. Siga las instrucciones en esta guía para conectar correctamente este
dispositivo a tierra.

Varning! Den här enheten måste vara ordentligt jordad. Följ instruktionerna i den här
guiden för att jorda enheten ordentligt.

Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning

LASER WARNING: Because invisible radiation might be emitted from the aperture of
the port when no fiber cable is connected, avoid exposure to radiation and do not stare
into open apertures.
Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van de poort kan
komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is, dient blootstelling aan straling en het kijken
in open openingen vermeden te worden.

Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua näkymätöntä säteilyä, kun kuitukaapelia ei
ole kytkettynä, vältä säteilylle altistumista äläkä katso avoimiin aukkoihin.

Avertissement Des radiations invisibles à l'il nu pouvant traverser l'ouverture du port


lorsqu'aucun câble en fibre optique n'y est connecté, il est recommandé de ne pas
regarder fixement l'intérieur de ces ouvertures.

Warnung Aus der Port-Öffnung können unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren, wenn kein
Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist. Vermeiden Sie es, sich den Strahlungen auszusetzen,
und starren Sie nicht in die Öffnungen!
269

Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti, radiazioni invisibili possono essere
emesse attraverso l'apertura della porta. Evitate di esporvi alle radiazioni e non guardate
direttamente nelle aperture.

Advarsel Unngå utsettelse for stråling, og stirr ikke inn i åpninger som er åpne, fordi
usynlig stråling kan emiteres fra portens åpning når det ikke er tilkoblet en fiberkabel.

Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emissão de radiação invisível através do orifício da via de


acesso, quando esta não tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado, deverá evitar an
EXposição à radiação e não deverá olhar fixamente para orifícios que se encontrarem a
descoberto.

¡Atención! Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiación invisible cuando
no existe un cable de fibra conectado, evite mirar directamente a las aperturas para no
exponerse a la radiación.

Varning! Osynlig strålning kan avges från en portöppning utan ansluten fiberkabel och
du bör därför undvika att bli utsatt för strålning genom att inte stirra in i oskyddade
öppningar.

Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings

IN THIS SECTION

General Laser Safety Guidelines | 270

Class 1 Laser Product Warning | 270

Class 1 LED Product Warning | 271

Laser Beam Warning | 271

Juniper Networks devices are equipped with laser transmitters, which are considered a Class 1 Laser
Product by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration and are evaluated as a Class 1 Laser Product per
IEC/EN 60825-1 requirements.

Observe the following guidelines and warnings:


270

General Laser Safety Guidelines

When working around ports that support optical transceivers, observe the following safety guidelines to
prevent eye injury:

• Do not look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown sources.

• Do not examine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments.

• Avoid direct exposure to the beam.

LASER WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laser radiation.
The lens in the human eye focuses all the laser power on the retina, so focusing the
eye directly on a laser source—even a low-power laser—could permanently damage the
eye.
Avertissement Les connecteurs à fibre optique sans terminaison peuvent émettre un
rayonnement laser invisible. Le cristallin de l’œil humain faisant converger toute la
puissance du laser sur la rétine, toute focalisation directe de l’œil sur une source laser,
—même de faible puissance—, peut entraîner des lésions oculaires irréversibles.

Class 1 Laser Product Warning

LASER WARNING: Class 1 laser product.


Waarschuwing Klasse-1 laser produkt.

Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote.

Avertissement Produit laser de classe I.

Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1.

Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1.

Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1.

Aviso Produto laser de classe 1.

¡Atención! Producto láser Clase I.

Varning! Laserprodukt av klass 1.


271

Class 1 LED Product Warning

LASER WARNING: Class 1 LED product.


Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED-product.

Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote.

Avertissement Alarme de produit LED Class I.

Warnung Class 1 LED-Produktwarnung.

Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1.

Advarsel LED-produkt i klasse 1.

Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED.

¡Atención! Aviso sobre producto LED de Clase 1.

Varning! Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1.

Laser Beam Warning

LASER WARNING: Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical
instruments.
Waarschuwing Niet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeks bekijken met optische
instrumenten.

Varoitus Älä katso säteeseen äläkä tarkastele sitä suoraan optisen laitteen avulla.

Avertissement Ne pas fixer le faisceau des yeux, ni l'observer directement à l'aide


d'instruments optiques.

Warnung Nicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direkt mit optischen Geräten
prüfen.

Avvertenza Non fissare il raggio con gli occhi né usare strumenti ottici per osservarlo
direttamente.

Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlen med optiske instrumenter.


272

Aviso Não olhe fixamente para o raio, nem olhe para ele directamente com
instrumentos ópticos.

¡Atención! No mirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamente con instrumentos


ópticos.

Varning! Rikta inte blicken in mot strålen och titta inte direkt på den genom optiska
instrument.

Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and


Warnings

IN THIS SECTION

Battery Handling Warning | 272

Jewelry Removal Warning | 273

Lightning Activity Warning | 275

Operating Temperature Warning | 276

Product Disposal Warning | 277

While performing the maintenance activities for devices, observe the following guidelines and warnings:

Battery Handling Warning

WARNING: Replacing a battery incorrectly might result in an explosion. Replace a


battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangen wordt.
Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type dat door de fabrikant
273

aanbevolen is. Gebruikte batterijen dienen overeenkomstig fabrieksvoorschriften


weggeworpen te worden.

Varoitus Räjähdyksen vaara, jos akku on vaihdettu väärään akkuun. Käytä vaihtamiseen
ainoastaan saman- tai vastaavantyyppistä akkua, joka on valmistajan suosittelema.
Hävitä käytetyt akut valmistajan ohjeiden mukaan.

Avertissement Danger d'explosion si la pile n'est pas remplacée correctement. Ne la


remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou équivalent, recommandée par le
fabricant. Jeter les piles usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.

Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr. Ersetzen Sie
die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp.
Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den Anweisungen des Herstellers.

Advarsel Det kan være fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes på feil måte. Skift kun
med samme eller tilsvarende type som er anbefalt av produsenten. Kasser brukte
batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner.

Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non è installata correttamente.


Sostituire solo con una di tipo uguale o equivalente, consigliata dal produttore. Eliminare
le batterie usate secondo le istruzioni del produttore.

Aviso Existe perigo de explosão se a bateria for substituída incorrectamente. Substitua


a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalente recomendado pelo fabricante.
Destrua as baterias usadas conforme as instruções do fabricante.

¡Atención! Existe peligro de explosión si la batería se reemplaza de manera incorrecta.


Reemplazar la baterían EXclusivamente con el mismo tipo o el equivalente
recomendado por el fabricante. Desechar las baterías gastadas según las instrucciones
del fabricante.

Varning! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Ersätt endast batteriet med samma
batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande. Följ tillverkarens
anvisningar vid kassering av använda batterier.

Jewelry Removal Warning

WARNING: Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines, remove


jewelry, including rings, necklaces, and watches. Metal objects heat up when connected
to power and ground and can cause serious burns or can be welded to the terminals.
274

Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrische leidingen is


verbonden, sieraden (inclusief ringen, kettingen en horloges) verwijderen. Metalen
voorwerpen worden warm wanneer ze met stroom en aarde zijn verbonden, en kunnen
ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de aansluitklemmen
lassen.

Varoitus Ennen kuin työskentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteiden parissa, ota


pois kaikki korut (sormukset, kaulakorut ja kellot mukaan lukien). Metalliesineet
kuumenevat, kun ne ovat yhteydessä sähkövirran ja maan kanssa, ja ne voivat aiheuttaa
vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet kiinni liitäntänapoihin.

Avertissement Avant d'accéder à cet équipement connecté aux lignes électriques, ôter
tout bijou (anneaux, colliers et montres compris). Lorsqu'ils sont branchés à
l'alimentation et reliés à la terre, les objets métalliques chauffent, ce qui peut provoquer
des blessures graves ou souder l'objet métallique aux bornes.

Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Geräten, die an das Netz angeschlossen sind, jeglichen
Schmuck (einschließlich Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) abnehmen. Metallgegenstände
erhitzen sich, wenn sie an das Netz und die Erde angeschlossen werden, und können
schwere Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die Anschlußklemmen angeschweißt
werden.

Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee di alimentazione,


togliersi qualsiasi monile (inclusi anelli, collane, braccialetti ed orologi). Gli oggetti
metallici si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra punti di alimentazione e massa: possono
causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallo può saldarsi ai terminali.

Advarsel Fjern alle smykker (inkludert ringer, halskjeder og klokker) før du skal arbeide
på utstyr som er koblet til kraftledninger. Metallgjenstander som er koblet til
kraftledninger og jord blir svært varme og kan forårsake alvorlige brannskader eller
smelte fast til polene.

Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas de corrente, retire
todas as jóias que estiver a usar (incluindo anéis, fios e relógios). Os objectos metálicos
aquecerão em contacto com a corrente e em contacto com a ligação à terra, podendo
causar queimaduras graves ou ficarem soldados aos terminais.

¡Atención! Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a líneas de alimentación, quitarse


las joyas (incluidos anillos, collares y relojes). Los objetos de metal se calientan cuando
se conectan a la alimentación y a tierra, lo que puede ocasionar quemaduras graves o
que los objetos metálicos queden soldados a los bornes.
275

Varning! Tag av alla smycken (inklusive ringar, halsband och armbandsur) innan du
arbetar på utrustning som är kopplad till kraftledningar. Metallobjekt hettas upp när de
kopplas ihop med ström och jord och kan förorsaka allvarliga brännskador; metallobjekt
kan också sammansvetsas med kontakterna.

Lightning Activity Warning

WARNING: Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods
of lightning activity.
Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem, dient u niet aan het
systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen.

Varoitus Älä työskentele järjestelmän parissa äläkä yhdistä tai irrota kaapeleita
ukkosilmalla.

Avertissement Ne pas travailler sur le système ni brancher ou débrancher les câbles


pendant un orage.

Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schließen Sie keine Kabel an bzw. trennen
Sie keine ab, wenn es gewittert.

Avvertenza Non lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavi durante un
temporale con fulmini.

Advarsel Utfør aldri arbeid på systemet, eller koble kabler til eller fra systemet når det
tordner eller lyner.

Aviso Não trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante períodos de mau
tempo (trovoada).

¡Atención! No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante el transcurso


de descargas eléctricas en la atmósfera.

Varning! Vid åska skall du aldrig utföra arbete på systemet eller ansluta eller koppla loss
kablar.
276

Operating Temperature Warning

WARNING: To prevent the device from overheating, do not operate it in an area that
exceeds the maximum recommended ambient temperature. To prevent airflow
restriction, allow at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance around the ventilation openings.
Waarschuwing Om te voorkomen dat welke switch van de Juniper Networks router dan
ook oververhit raakt, dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaats waar de maximale
aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40° C wordt overschreden. Om te voorkomen
dat de luchtstroom wordt beperkt, dient er minstens 15,2 cm speling rond de ventilatie-
openingen te zijn.

Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks switch-sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi, sitä ei saa käyttää
tilassa, jonka lämpötila ylittää korkeimman suositellun ympäristölämpötilan 40° C. Ettei
ilmanvaihto estyisi, tuuletusaukkojen ympärille on jätettävä ainakin 15,2 cm tilaa.

Avertissement Pour éviter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme Juniper


Networks switch, ne l'utilisez pas dans une zone où la température ambiante est
supérieure à 40° C. Pour permettre un flot d'air constant, dégagez un espace d'au moins
15,2 cm autour des ouvertures de ventilations.

Warnung Um einen Router der switch vor Überhitzung zu schützen, darf dieser nicht in
einer Gegend betrieben werden, in der die Umgebungstemperatur das empfohlene
Maximum von 40° C überschreitet. Um Lüftungsverschluß zu verhindern, achten Sie
darauf, daß mindestens 15,2 cm lichter Raum um die Lüftungsöffnungen herum frei
bleibt.

Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei switch, non adoperateli in un locale che
ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 40° C. Per evitare che la circolazione
dell'aria sia impedita, lasciate uno spazio di almeno 15.2 cm di fronte alle aperture delle
ventole.

Advarsel Unngå overoppheting av eventuelle rutere i Juniper Networks switch Disse


skal ikke brukes på steder der den anbefalte maksimale omgivelsestemperaturen
overstiger 40° C (104° F). Sørg for at klaringen rundt lufteåpningene er minst 15,2 cm
(6 tommer) for å forhindre nedsatt luftsirkulasjon.

Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networks switch, não


utilize este equipamento numa área que exceda a temperatura máxima recomendada de
40° C. Para evitar a restrição à circulação de ar, deixe pelo menos um espaço de 15,2 cm
à volta das aberturas de ventilação.
277

¡Atención! Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networks switch se


recaliente, no lo haga funcionar en un área en la que se supere la temperatura ambiente
máxima recomendada de 40° C. Para impedir la restricción de la entrada de aire, deje un
espacio mínimo de 15,2 cm alrededor de las aperturas para ventilación.

Varning! Förhindra att en Juniper Networks switch överhettas genom att inte använda
den i ett område där den maximalt rekommenderade omgivningstemperaturen på 40° C
överskrids. Förhindra att luftcirkulationen inskränks genom att se till att det finns fritt
utrymme på minst 15,2 cm omkring ventilationsöppningarna.

Product Disposal Warning

WARNING: Disposal of this device must be handled according to all national laws and
regulations.
Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten en voorschriften te
worden afgedankt.

Varoitus Tämän tuotteen lopullisesta hävittämisestä tulee huolehtia kaikkia


valtakunnallisia lakeja ja säännöksiä noudattaen.

Avertissement La mise au rebut définitive de ce produit doit être effectuée


conformément à toutes les lois et réglementations en vigueur.

Warnung Dieses Produkt muß den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften entsprechend
entsorgt werden.

Avvertenza L'eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguita osservando le


normative italiane vigenti in materia

Advarsel Endelig disponering av dette produktet må skje i henhold til nasjonale lover og
forskrifter.

Aviso A descartagem final deste produto deverá ser efectuada de acordo com os
regulamentos e a legislação nacional.

¡Atención! El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse según todas las leyes y
regulaciones nacionales

Varning! Slutlig kassering av denna produkt bör skötas i enlighet med landets alla lagar
och föreskrifter.
278

General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings

WARNING: Certain ports on the device are designed for use as intrabuilding (within-
the-building) interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE)
and require isolation from the exposed outside plant (OSP) cabling. To comply with
NEBS (Network Equipment-Building System) requirements and protect against lightning
surges and commercial power disturbances, the intrabuilding ports must not be
metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. The
intrabuilding ports on the device are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or
unexposed wiring or cabling only. The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient
protection for connecting these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
Avertissement Certains ports de l’appareil sont destinés à un usage en intérieur
uniquement (ports Type 2 ou Type 4 tels que décrits dans le document GR-1089-CORE)
et doivent être isolés du câblage de l’installation extérieure exposée. Pour respecter les
exigences NEBS et assurer une protection contre la foudre et les perturbations de
tension secteur, les ports pour intérieur ne doivent pas être raccordés physiquement
aux interfaces prévues pour la connexion à l’installation extérieure ou à son câblage. Les
ports pour intérieur de l’appareil sont réservés au raccordement de câbles pour intérieur
ou non exposés uniquement. L’ajout de protections ne constitue pas une précaution
suffisante pour raccorder physiquement ces interfaces au câblage de l’installation
extérieure.

CAUTION: Before removing or installing components of a device, connect an


electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to an ESD point and wrap and fasten the
other end of the strap around your bare wrist. Failure to use an ESD grounding strap
could result in damage to the device.
Attention Avant de retirer ou d’installer des composants d’un appareil, raccordez un
bracelet antistatique à un point de décharge électrostatique et fixez le bracelet à votre
poignet nu. L’absence de port d’un bracelet antistatique pourrait provoquer des dégâts
sur l’appareil.

• Install the device in compliance with the following local, national, and international electrical codes:

• United States—National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70), United States National Electrical
Code.

• Other countries—International Electromechanical Commission (IEC) 60364, Part 1 through Part 7.

• Evaluated to the TN power system.


279

• Canada—Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, CSA C22.1.

• Suitable for installation in Information Technology Rooms in accordance with Article 645 of the
National Electrical Code and NFPA 75.

Peut être installé dans des salles de matériel de traitement de l’information conformément à
l’article 645 du National Electrical Code et à la NFPA 75.

• Locate the emergency power-off switch for the room in which you are working so that if an electrical
accident occurs, you can quickly turn off the power.

• Make sure that you clean grounding surface and give them a bright finish before making grounding
connections.

• Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist anywhere in your workspace.

• Never assume that power is disconnected from a circuit. Always check the circuit before starting to
work.

• Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area, such as moist floors, ungrounded power
extension cords, and missing safety grounds.

• Operate the device within marked electrical ratings and product usage instructions.

• To ensure that the device and peripheral equipment function safely and correctly, use the cables and
connectors specified for the attached peripheral equipment, and make certain they are in good
condition.

You can remove and replace many device components without powering off or disconnecting power to
the device, as detailed elsewhere in the hardware documentation for this device. Never install
equipment that appears to be damaged.

Action to Take After an Electrical Accident

If an electrical accident results in an injury, take the following actions in this order:

1. Use caution. Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further injury.

2. Disconnect power from the device.

3. If possible, send another person to get medical aid. Otherwise, assess the condition of the victim, and
then call for help.
280

Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage

Device components that are shipped in antistatic bags are sensitive to damage from static electricity.
Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 30 V. You can easily generate potentially
damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic or foam packing material or if you move
components across plastic or carpets. Observe the following guidelines to minimize the potential for
electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage, which can cause intermittent or complete component failures:

• Always use an ESD wrist strap when you are handling components that are subject to ESD damage,
and make sure that it is in direct contact with your skin.

If a grounding strap is not available, hold the component in its antistatic bag (see Figure 183 on page
281) in one hand and touch the exposed, bare metal of the device with the other hand immediately
before inserting the component into the device.

WARNING: For safety, periodically check the resistance value of the ESD grounding
strap. The measurement must be in the range 1 through 10 Mohms.
Avertissement Par mesure de sécurité, vérifiez régulièrement la résistance du bracelet
antistatique. Cette valeur doit être comprise entre 1 et 10 mégohms (Mohms).

• When handling any component that is subject to ESD damage and that is removed from the device,
make sure the equipment end of your ESD wrist strap is attached to the ESD point on the chassis.

If no grounding strap is available, touch the exposed, bare metal of the device to ground yourself
before handling the component.

• Avoid contact between the component that is subject to ESD damage and your clothing. ESD
voltages emitted from clothing can damage components.

• When removing or installing a component that is subject to ESD damage, always place it component-
side up on an antistatic surface, in an antistatic card rack, or in an antistatic bag (see Figure 183 on
page 281). If you are returning a component, place it in an antistatic bag before packing it.
281

Figure 183: Placing a Component into an Antistatic Bag

CAUTION: ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 cables such as Category 5e and Category 6 can get


electrostatically charged. To dissipate this charge, always ground the cables to a suitable
and safe earth ground before connecting them to the system.
Attention Les câbles ANSI/TIA/EIA-568, par exemple Cat 5e et Cat 6, peuvent
emmagasiner des charges électrostatiques. Pour évacuer ces charges, reliez toujours les
câbles à une prise de terre adaptée avant de les raccorder au système.

AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines

The following electrical safety guidelines apply to AC-powered devices:

• Note the following warnings printed on the device:

“CAUTION: THIS UNIT HAS MORE THAN ONE POWER SUPPLY CORD. DISCONNECT ALL
POWER SUPPLY CORDS BEFORE SERVICING TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK.”

“ATTENTION: CET APPAREIL COMPORTE PLUS D'UN CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. AFIN DE


PRÉVENIR LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, DÉBRANCHER TOUT CORDON D'ALIMENTATION AVANT
DE FAIRE LE DÉPANNAGE.”
282

• AC-powered devices are shipped with a three-wire electrical cord with a grounding-type plug that
fits only a grounding-type power outlet. Do not circumvent this safety feature. Equipment grounding
must comply with local and national electrical codes.

• You must provide an external certified circuit breaker (2-pole circuit breaker or 4-pole circuit breaker
based on your device) rated minimum 20 A in the building installation.

• The power cord serves as the main disconnecting device for the AC-powered device. The socket
outlet must be near the AC-powered device and be easily accessible.

• For devices that have more than one power supply connection, you must ensure that all power
connections are fully disconnected so that power to the device is completely removed to prevent
electric shock. To disconnect power, unplug all power cords (one for each power supply).

Power Cable Warning (Japanese)

WARNING: The attached power cable is only for this product. Do not use the cable for another product.

AC Power Disconnection Warning

WARNING: Before working on the device or near power supplies, unplug all the power
cords from an AC-powered device.
Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen werkt, dient u
bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit het stopcontact te halen.

Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto, ennen kuin teet mitään


asennuspohjalle tai työskentelet virtalähteiden läheisyydessä.

Avertissement Avant de travailler sur un châssis ou à proximité d'une alimentation


électrique, débrancher le cordon d'alimentation des unités en courant alternatif.
283

Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nähe von Netzgeräten arbeiten,
ziehen Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw.

Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori, scollegare il cavo di


alimentazione sulle unità CA.

Advarsel Før det utføres arbeid på kabinettet eller det arbeides i nærheten av
strømforsyningsenheter, skal strømledningen trekkes ut på vekselstrømsenheter.

Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis, ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades de


fornecimento de energia, desligue o cabo de alimentação nas unidades de corrente
alternada.

¡Atención! Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una fuente de


alimentación, desenchufar el cable de alimentación en los equipos de corriente alterna
(CA).

Varning! Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller nära strömförsörjningsenheter skall du för
växelströmsenheter dra ur nätsladden.

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines

• A DC-powered device is equipped with a DC terminal block that is rated for the power requirements
of a maximally configured device.

• For permanently connected equipment, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated
external to the equipment.

• For pluggable equipment, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily
accessible.

• Be sure to connect the ground wire or conduit to a solid central office earth ground.

• A closed loop ring is recommended for terminating the ground conductor at the ground stud.

• Run two wires from the circuit breaker box to a source of 48 VDC.

• A DC-powered device that is equipped with a DC terminal block is intended only for installation in a
restricted-access location. In the United States, a restricted-access area is one in accordance with
Articles 110-16, 110-17, and 110-18 of the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70.
284

NOTE: Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building circuit breaker. This breaker
must protect against excess currents, short circuits, and earth grounding faults in accordance
with NEC ANSI/NFPA 70.

• Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct. Under certain conditions, connections with
reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit breaker or damage the equipment.

• The marked input voltage of –48 VDC for a DC-powered device is the nominal voltage associated
with the battery circuit, and any higher voltages are only to be associated with float voltages for the
charging function.

• Because the device is a positive ground system, you must connect the positive lead to the terminal
labeled RTN, the negative lead to the terminal labeled –48 VDC, and the earth ground to the device
grounding points.

DC Power Disconnection Warning

WARNING: Before performing any of the DC power procedures, ensure that power is
removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit breaker
on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF
position, and tape the device handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position.
Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert, dient u te
controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld is. Om u ervan te
verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld, kiest u op het schakelbord de
stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient, draait de stroomverbreker naar de
UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met plakband in de
UIT positie vast.

Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien toimenpiteiden


suorittamista. Varmistaaksesi, että virta on KATKAISTU täysin, paikanna tasavirrasta
huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin, käännä suojakytkin KATKAISTU-
asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi niin, että se pysyy KATKAISTU-asennossa.

Avertissement Avant de pratiquer l'une quelconque des procédures ci-dessous, vérifier


que le circuit en courant continu n'est plus sous tension. Pour en être sûr, localiser le
disjoncteur situé sur le panneau de service du circuit en courant continu, placer le
285

disjoncteur en position fermée (OFF) et, à l'aide d'un ruban adhésif, bloquer la poignée
du disjoncteur en position OFF.

Warnung Vor Ausführung der folgenden Vorgänge ist sicherzustellen, daß die
Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erhält. Um sicherzustellen, daß sämtlicher Strom
abgestellt ist, machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den Unterbrecher für die
Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig, stellen Sie den Unterbrecher auf AUS, und kleben Sie
den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS-Stellung fest.

Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti, verificare che il
circuito CC non sia alimentato. Per verificare che tutta l'alimentazione sia scollegata
(OFF), individuare l'interruttore automatico sul quadro strumenti che alimenta il circuito
CC, mettere l'interruttore in posizione OFF e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale
posizione.

Advarsel Før noen av disse prosedyrene utføres, kontroller at strømmen er frakoblet


likestrømkretsen. Sørg for at all strøm er slått AV. Dette gjøres ved å lokalisere
strømbryteren på brytertavlen som betjener likestrømkretsen, slå strømbryteren AV og
teipe bryterhåndtaket på strømbryteren i AV-stilling.

Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos, certifique-se que desligou a


fonte de alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua. Para se assegurar que
toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA, localize o disjuntor no painel que serve o circuito de
corrente contínua e coloque-o na posição OFF (Desligado), segurando nessa posição a
manivela do interruptor do disjuntor com fita isoladora.

¡Atención! Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos, comprobar que la alimentación
del circuito de corriente continua (CC) esté cortada (OFF). Para asegurarse de que toda
la alimentación esté cortada (OFF), localizar el interruptor automático en el panel que
alimenta al circuito de corriente continua, cambiar el interruptor automático a la
posición de Apagado (OFF), y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor automático en
posición de Apagado (OFF).

Varning! Innan du utför någon av följande procedurer måste du kontrollera att


strömförsörjningen till likströmskretsen är bruten. Kontrollera att all strömförsörjning är
BRUTEN genom att slå AV det överspänningsskydd som skyddar likströmskretsen och
tejpa fast överspänningsskyddets omkopplare i FRÅN-läget.
286

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning

An insulated grounding conductor that is identical in size to the grounded and ungrounded branch
circuit supply conductors but is identifiable by green and yellow stripes is installed as part of the branch
circuit that supplies the device. The grounding conductor is a separately derived system at the supply
transformer or motor generator set.

WARNING: When you install the device, the ground connection must always be made
first and disconnected last.
Waarschuwing Bij de installatie van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het eerste
worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt.

Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa on maahan yhdistäminen aina tehtävä ensiksi ja


maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi.

Avertissement Lors de l'installation de l'appareil, la mise à la terre doit toujours être


connectée en premier et déconnectée en dernier.

Warnung Der Erdanschluß muß bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuerst hergestellt
und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.

Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell'unità, eseguire sempre per primo il collegamento


a massa e disconnetterlo per ultimo.

Advarsel Når enheten installeres, må jordledningen alltid tilkobles først og frakobles sist.

Aviso Ao instalar a unidade, a ligação à terra deverá ser sempre a primeira a ser ligada, e
a última a ser desligada.

¡Atención! Al instalar el equipo, conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarla la última.

Varning! Vid installation av enheten måste jordledningen alltid anslutas först och
kopplas bort sist.

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning

WARNING: Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs. When connecting
power, the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground, +RTN to +RTN, then –48 V to –
287

48 V. When disconnecting power, the proper wiring sequence is –48 V to –48 V, +RTN
to +RTN, then ground to ground. Note that the ground wire must always be connected
first and disconnected last.
Waarschuwing De juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde, +RTN naar
+RTN, en –48 V naar – 48 V. De juiste bedradingsvolgorde losgemaakt is en –48 naar –
48 V, +RTN naar +RTN, aarde naar aarde.

Varoitus Oikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys on maajohto maajohtoon, +RTN varten


+RTN, –48 V varten – 48 V. Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestys on –48 V varten – 48 V,
+RTN varten +RTN, maajohto maajohtoon.

Avertissement Câblez l'approvisionnement d'alimentation CC En utilisant les crochets


appropriés à l'extrémité de câblage. En reliant la puissance, l'ordre approprié de câblage
est rectifié pour rectifier, +RTN à +RTN, puis –48 V à –48 V. En débranchant la
puissance, l'ordre approprié de câblage est –48 V à –48 V, +RTN à +RTN, a alors rectifié
pour rectifier. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché
pour la dernière fois. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et
débranché pour la dernière fois.

Warnung Die Stromzufuhr ist nur mit geeigneten Ringösen an das DC Netzteil
anzuschliessen. Die richtige Anschlusssequenz ist: Erdanschluss zu Erdanschluss, +RTN
zu +RTN und dann -48V zu -48V. Die richtige Sequenz zum Abtrennen der
Stromversorgung ist -48V zu -48V, +RTN zu +RTN und dann Erdanschluss zu
Erdanschluss. Es ist zu beachten dass der Erdanschluss immer zuerst angeschlossen und
als letztes abgetrennt wird.

Avvertenza Mostra la morsettiera dell alimentatore CC. Cablare l'alimentatore CC


usando i connettori adatti all'estremità del cablaggio, come illustrato. La corretta
sequenza di cablaggio è da massa a massa, da positivo a positivo (da linea ad L) e da
negativo a negativo (da neutro a N). Tenere presente che il filo di massa deve sempre
venire collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo.

Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord, +RTN til +RTN, –48 V til –
48 V. Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er –48 V til – 48 V, +RTN til +RTN, jord til jord.

Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminales apropiados en el
extremo del cableado. Al conectar potencia, la secuencia apropiada del cableado se
muele para moler, +RTN a +RTN, entonces –48 V a –48 V. Al desconectar potencia, la
secuencia apropiada del cableado es –48 V a –48 V, +RTN a +RTN, entonces molió para
moler. Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y
desconectar por último. Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre
primero y desconectar por último.
288

¡Atención! Wire a fonte de alimentação de DC Usando os talões apropriados nan


EXtremidade da fiação. Ao conectar a potência, a seqüência apropriada da fiação é
moída para moer, +RTN a +RTN, então –48 V a –48 V. Ao desconectar a potência, a
seqüência apropriada da fiação é –48 V a –48 V, +RTN a +RTN, moeu então para moer.
Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por
último. Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e
desconectado por último.

Varning! Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord, +RTN till +RTN, –48 V till –48 V.
Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar –48 V till –48 V, +RTN till +RTN, jord till jord.

DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning

WARNING: When stranded wiring is required, use approved wiring terminations, such
as closed-loop or spade-type with upturned lugs. These terminations must be the
appropriate size for the wires and must clamp both the insulation and conductor.
Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is, dient u bedrading te gebruiken
die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten, zoals het gesloten-lus type of het
grijperschop type waarbij de aansluitpunten omhoog wijzen. Deze aansluitpunten
dienen de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben en dienen zowel de isolatie als de
geleider vast te klemmen.

Varoitus Jos säikeellinen johdin on tarpeen, käytä hyväksyttyä johdinliitäntää,


esimerkiksi suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liitäntää, jossa on ylöspäin käännetyt
kiinnityskorvat. Tällaisten liitäntöjen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin sopivia ja niiden tulee
puristaa yhteen sekä eristeen että johdinosan.

Avertissement Quand des fils torsadés sont nécessaires, utiliser des douilles terminales
homologuées telles que celles à circuit fermé ou du type à plage ouverte avec cosses
rebroussées. Ces douilles terminales doivent être de la taille qui convient aux fils et
doivent être refermées sur la gaine isolante et sur le conducteur.

Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist, sind zugelassene


Verdrahtungsabschlüsse, z.B. für einen geschlossenen Regelkreis oder gabelförmig, mit
nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden. Diese Abschlüsse sollten die
angemessene Größe für die Drähte haben und sowohl die Isolierung als auch den Leiter
festklemmen.
289

Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce, usare connettori omologati, come quelli a
occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l'alto. I connettori devono avere la
misura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l'isolante che il conduttore.

Advarsel Hvis det er nødvendig med flertrådede ledninger, brukes godkjente


ledningsavslutninger, som for eksempel lukket sløyfe eller spadetype med
oppoverbøyde kabelsko. Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig størrelse i forhold til
ledningene, og skal klemme sammen både isolasjonen og lederen.

Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalação eléctrica de cabo torcido, use
terminações de cabo aprovadas, tais como, terminações de cabo em circuito fechado e
planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima. Estas terminações de cabo deverão
ser do tamanho apropriado para os respectivos cabos, e deverão prender
simultaneamente o isolamento e o fio condutor.

¡Atención! Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado, utilizar terminales para cables


homologados, tales como las de tipo "bucle cerrado" o "espada", con las lengüetas de
conexión vueltas hacia arriba. Estos terminales deberán ser del tamaño apropiado para
los cables que se utilicen, y tendrán que sujetar tanto el aislante como el conductor.

Varning! När flertrådiga ledningar krävs måste godkända ledningskontakter användas,


t.ex. kabelsko av sluten eller öppen typ med uppåtvänd tapp. Storleken på dessa
kontakter måste vara avpassad till ledningarna och måste kunna hålla både isoleringen
och ledaren fastklämda.

Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning

WARNING: The network device has more than one power supply connection. All
connections must be removed completely to remove power from the unit completely.
Waarschuwing Deze eenheid heeft meer dan één stroomtoevoerverbinding; alle
verbindingen moeten volledig worden verwijderd om de stroom van deze eenheid
volledig te verwijderen.

Varoitus Tässä laitteessa on useampia virtalähdekytkentöjä. Kaikki kytkennät on


irrotettava kokonaan, jotta virta poistettaisiin täysin laitteesta.
290

Avertissement Cette unité est équipée de plusieurs raccordements d'alimentation. Pour


supprimer tout courant électrique de l'unité, tous les cordons d'alimentation doivent
être débranchés.

Warnung Diese Einheit verfügt über mehr als einen Stromanschluß; um Strom gänzlich
von der Einheit fernzuhalten, müssen alle Stromzufuhren abgetrennt sein.

Avvertenza Questa unità ha più di una connessione per alimentatore elettrico; tutte le
connessioni devono essere completamente rimosse per togliere l'elettricità dall'unità.

Advarsel Denne enheten har mer enn én strømtilkobling. Alle tilkoblinger må kobles helt
fra for å eliminere strøm fra enheten.

Aviso Este dispositivo possui mais do que uma conexão de fonte de alimentação de
energia; para poder remover a fonte de alimentação de energia, deverão ser
desconectadas todas as conexões existentes.

¡Atención! Esta unidad tiene más de una conexión de suministros de alimentación; para
eliminar la alimentación por completo, deben desconectarse completamente todas las
conexiones.

Varning! Denna enhet har mer än en strömförsörjningsanslutning; alla anslutningar


måste vara helt avlägsnade innan strömtillförseln till enheten är fullständigt bruten.

TN Power Warning

WARNING: The device is designed to work with a TN power system.


Waarschuwing Het apparaat is ontworpen om te functioneren met TN
energiesystemen.

Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN-sähkövoimajärjestelmien yhteydessä.

Avertissement Ce dispositif a été conçu pour fonctionner avec des systèmes


d'alimentation TN.

Warnung Das Gerät ist für die Verwendung mit TN-Stromsystemen ausgelegt.

Avvertenza Il dispositivo è stato progettato per l'uso con sistemi di alimentazione TN.

Advarsel Utstyret er utfomet til bruk med TN-strømsystemer.


291

Aviso O dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN.

¡Atención! El equipo está diseñado para trabajar con sistemas de alimentación tipo TN.

Varning! Enheten är konstruerad för användning tillsammans med elkraftssystem av TN-


typ.

Agency Approvals for QFX5120 Switches

IN THIS SECTION

Compliance Statement for Argentina | 293

QFX5120 switches comply with the following standards:

• Safety

• CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1, Safety of Information Technology Equipment

• UL 60950-1 (2nd Ed.) Information Technology Equipment - Safety

• EN 60950-1:2006/A2:2013 Information Technology Equipment - Safety

• IEC 60950-1:2005/A2:2013 Information Technology Equipment - Safety (All country deviations):


CB Scheme

• EN 60825-1 Safety of Laser Products - Part 1: Equipment Classification, Requirements and User's
Guide

• CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 62368-1-14, Audio/Video, Information and Communication Technology


Equipment

• UL 62368-1, Audio/Video, Information and Communication Technology Equipment – Safety

• IEC 62368-1: 2014 Audio/Video, Information and Communication Technology Equipment –


Safety (All country deviations): CB Scheme report

• EMC
292

• EN 300 386 V1.6.1 (2012-09) Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Telecommunication network equipment; Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements

• EN 55032:2012 + EN55032:2012/AC:2013 Electromagnetic compatibility of multimedia


equipment - Emission requirements

• EN 300 386 V2.1.1 (2016-07) Telecommunication network equipment; Electro Magnetic


Compatibility (EMC) requirements; Harmonized Standard covering the essential requirements of
the Directive 2014/30/EU

• CISPR 22 edition 6.0 : 2008-09

• EN 55032:2015 (CISPR 32:2015) Electromagnetic compatibility of multimedia equipment -


Emission requirements

• EN 55024:2010 (CISPR 24:2010) Information technology equipment - Immunity characteristics -


Limits and methods of measurement

• CISPR 24 edition 2b :2010 COREC 2011 IT Equipment Immunity Characteristics

• EN 55035:2017 (CISPR 35:2016) Electromagnetic compatibility of multimedia equipment -


Immunity requirements

• IEC/EN 61000 Immunity Test

• AS/NZS CISPR 32:2015 Australia/New Zealand Radiated and Conducted Emissions

• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 USA Radiated and Conducted Emissions

• IC ICES-003 Canada Radiated and Conducted Emissions

• VCCI-CISPR 32:2016 Japanese Radiated and Conducted Emissions

• EN 55022:2010/AC:2011 European Radiated Emissions

• CISPR 32:2016

• BSMI CNS 13438 Taiwan Radiated and Conducted Emissions (at 10 Meter)

• KN 32 and KN 35 Korea Radiated Emission and Immunity Characteristics (at 10 Meter)

• KN 61000 Korea Immunity Test

• IEC/EN 61000 Immunity Test

• TEC/SD/DD/EMC-221/05/OCT-16 (Supersedes No. TEC/EMI/TEL-001/01/FEB-09) India EMC


standard

• Juniper Inductive GND (JIG)


293

• Reduction of Hazardous Substances (ROHS) 6/6

• Telco—Common Language Equipment Identifier (CLEI) code

Compliance Statement for Argentina

EQUIPO DE USO IDÓNEO.

Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for


the QFX Series

IN THIS SECTION

Canada | 293

European Community | 294

Israel | 295

Japan | 295

Korea | 295

Taiwan | 296

United States | 296

Nonregulatory Environmental Standards | 296

This topic describes the EMC requirements for the QFX Series.

Canada

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.


294

The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment
meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. Industry
Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users’ satisfaction.

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to connect the equipment to
the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an
acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the inside wiring associated with a single line
individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly. The customer should be
aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some
situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility


designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment
malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the
equipment.

CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make electrical ground connections by


themselves, but should contact the appropriate inspection authority or an electrician, as
appropriate.

Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This
precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.

European Community

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
295

Israel

Translation from Hebrew–Warning: This product is Class A. In residential environments, the product may
cause radio interference, and in such a situation, the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Japan

The preceding translates as follows:

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

VCCI-A

Korea

The preceding translates as follows:


296

This equipment is Industrial (Class A) electromagnetic wave suitability equipment and seller or user
should take notice of it, and this equipment is to be used in the places except for home.

Taiwan

The preceding translates as follows:

This is Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

United States

The QFX Series device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Nonregulatory Environmental Standards

These QFX Series product SKUs are Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) compliant:

• QFX3008-I

• QFX3600-I

• QFX3600
297

• QFX3500

• QFX5100

• QFX5110

• QFX5200-32C

• QFX10002-36Q and QFX10002-72Q

• QFX10008

• QFX10016

Those device product SKUs meet the following NEBS compliance standards:

• SR-3580 NEBS Criteria Levels (Level 3 Compliance)

• GR-1089-CORE, Issue 6: EMC and Electrical Safety—Generic Criteria for Network


Telecommunications Equipment

• The equipment is suitable for installation in locations where the National Electrical Code (NEC)
applies.

• The battery return connection is to be treated as an Isolated DC return (DC-I), as defined in


GR-1089-CORE.

• GR-63-CORE: NEBS, Physical Protection

• The equipment is suitable for installation as part of the Common Bonding Network (CBN).

• The equipment is suitable for installation in a central office (CO).

RELATED DOCUMENTATION

Agency Approvals for the QFX Series

Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)


Directive Compliance

Juniper Networks is committed to environmentally responsible behavior. As part of this commitment, we


continually work to comply with environmental standards such as the Restriction of Hazardous
Substances (RoHS) Directive.
298

You might also like